Huawei Imanager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01
Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Issue Date 03 2010-08-16
HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.
Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 2010. All rights reserved. No part of this document may be reproduced or transmitted in any form or by any means without prior written consent of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
Trademarks and Permissions

and other Huawei trademarks are trademarks of Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. All other trademarks and trade names mentioned in this document are the property of their respective holders.
Notice
The purchased products, services and features are stipulated by the contract made between Huawei and the customer. All or part of the products, services and features described in this document may not be within the purchase scope or the usage scope. Unless otherwise specified in the contract, all statements, information, and recommendations in this document are provided "AS IS" without warranties, guarantees or representations of any kind, either express or implied. The information in this document is subject to change without notice. Every effort has been made in the preparation of this document to ensure accuracy of the contents, but all statements, information, and recommendations in this document do not constitute the warranty of any kind, express or implied.
Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Address: Huawei Industrial Base Bantian, Longgang Shenzhen 518129 People's Republic of China http://www.huawei.com support@huawei.com
Website: Email:
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.
iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)
About This Document
About This Document

Related Versions
The following table lists the product versions related to this document. Product Name iManager U2000 Version V100R002C01
Intended Audience
Focusing on the configuration management of the CORBA NBI, this document describes the enhanced development of the NBI from the aspects as follows: basic information, interface function, information model, and interface model. This document provides the reference information about the configuration management of the CORBA NBI. This document is intended for:
l l
Application Developer Data Configuration Engineer
Symbol Conventions
The symbols that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Symbol Description
DANGER
Indicates a hazard with a high level of risk, which if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Indicates a hazard with a medium or low level of risk, which if not avoided, could result in minor or moderate injury.
WARNING
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
iii
About This Document
Symbol
Description
CAUTION
TIP
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided, could result in equipment damage, data loss, performance degradation, or unexpected results. Indicates a tip that may help you solve a problem or save time. Provides additional information to emphasize or supplement important points of the main text.
NOTE
Command Conventions
The command conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface Italic [] { x | y | ... } [ x | y | ... ] { x | y | ... }* Description The keywords of a command line are in boldface. Command arguments are in italics. Items (keywords or arguments) in brackets [ ] are optional. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. One item is selected or no item is selected. Optional items are grouped in braces and separated by vertical bars. A minimum of one item or a maximum of all items can be selected. Optional items are grouped in brackets and separated by vertical bars. Several items or no item can be selected.
[ x | y | ... ]*
GUI Conventions
The GUI conventions that may be found in this document are defined as follows. Convention Boldface > Description Buttons, menus, parameters, tabs, window, and dialog titles are in boldface. For example, click OK. Multi-level menus are in boldface and separated by the ">" signs. For example, choose File > Create > Folder.
iv
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
About This Document
Change History
Updates between document issues are cumulative. Therefore, the latest document issue contains all updates made in previous issues.
Changes in Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Errors are corrected.

Errors are corrected.

Initial release.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Contents
Contents
About This Document...................................................................................................................iii 1 Overview......................................................................................................................................1-1
1.1 Introduction.....................................................................................................................................................1-2 1.2 Configuration Management.............................................................................................................................1-2
2 Format of Notification Events..................................................................................................2-1

2.1 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event............................................................................................2-2 2.1.1 Header Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event......................................................................2-2 2.1.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event (filterable_data)........................................................2-2 2.1.3 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event (remainder_of_body)...............................................2-3 2.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event............................................................................................2-3 2.2.1 Header Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event.......................................................................2-4 2.2.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event (filterable_data)........................................................2-4 2.2.3 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event (remainder_of_body)................................................2-5 2.3 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event........................................................................2-5 2.3.1 Header Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event...................................................2-5 2.3.2 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)....................................2-6 2.3.3 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)............................2-7 2.4 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event.................................................................................................2-7 2.4.1 Header Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event............................................................................2-7 2.4.2 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)..............................................................2-8 2.4.3 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body).....................................................2-9 2.5 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event......................................................................................2-9 2.5.1 Header Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event.................................................................2-9 2.5.2 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data).................................................2-10 2.5.3 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)........................................2-12 2.6 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event...........................................................................2-12 2.6.1 Header Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event......................................................2-13 2.6.2 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)........................................2-13 2.6.3 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)...............................2-14 2.7 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event..........................................................................2-14 2.7.1 Header Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event.....................................................2-14 2.7.2 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)......................................2-15 Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. vii
Contents
iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration) 2.7.3 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)..............................2-16
2.8 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event.............................................................................2-16 2.8.1 Header Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event.......................................................2-17 2.8.2 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data).........................................2-17 2.8.3 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)................................2-18 2.9 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event..................................................................................2-18 2.9.1 Header Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event............................................................2-19 2.9.2 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)..............................................2-19 2.9.3 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)......................................2-20 2.10 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event...............................................................................2-21 2.10.1 Header Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event.........................................................2-21 2.10.2 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)...........................................2-21 2.10.3 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)...................................2-22 2.11 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event............................................................................................2-22 2.11.1 Header Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event.......................................................................2-23 2.11.2 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data).........................................................2-23 2.11.3 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)................................................2-24 2.12 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event........................................................................2-24 2.12.1 Header Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event..................................................2-24 2.12.2 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)....................................2-25 2.12.3 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)............................2-26 2.13 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event............................................................................2-26 2.13.1 Header Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event.......................................................2-26 2.13.2 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event (filterable_data).........................................2-27 2.13.3 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event (remainder_of_body)................................2-28 2.14 Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event........................................................................................2-28 2.14.1 Header Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event..................................................................2-28 2.14.2 Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event (filterable_data)....................................................2-29 2.15 Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event.....................................................................................................2-29 2.15.1 Header Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event...............................................................................2-30 2.15.2 Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event (filterable_data).................................................................2-30
3 Information Model.....................................................................................................................3-1
3.1 emsMgr............................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.1.1 EMS_T...................................................................................................................................................3-2 3.2 equipment........................................................................................................................................................3-4 3.2.1 EQTCreateData_T..................................................................................................................................3-4 3.2.2 Equipment_T..........................................................................................................................................3-5 3.2.3 EquipmentHolder_T...............................................................................................................................3-6 3.3 managedElement.............................................................................................................................................3-7 3.3.1 ManagedElement_T...............................................................................................................................3-7 3.4 subnetworkConnection....................................................................................................................................3-8 3.4.1 CrossConnect_T.....................................................................................................................................3-8 viii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Contents
3.4.2 TPData_T...............................................................................................................................................3-9 3.4.3 SubnetworkConnection_T......................................................................................................................3-9 3.4.4 SNCCreateData_T................................................................................................................................3-11 3.4.5 SNCModifyData_T..............................................................................................................................3-15 3.5 multiLayerSubnetwork..................................................................................................................................3-18 3.5.1 MultiLayerSubnetwork_T....................................................................................................................3-18 3.6 topologicalLink.............................................................................................................................................3-19 3.6.1 TopologicalLink_T...............................................................................................................................3-19 3.7 terminationPoint............................................................................................................................................3-19 3.7.1 TerminationPoint_T.............................................................................................................................3-20 3.8 protection.......................................................................................................................................................3-21 3.8.1 ProtectionGroup_T...............................................................................................................................3-22 3.8.2 SwitchData_T.......................................................................................................................................3-28 3.8.3 WDMProtectionGroup_T.....................................................................................................................3-29 3.8.4 WDMSwitchData_T.............................................................................................................................3-30 3.8.5 EProtectionGroup_T............................................................................................................................3-31 3.8.6 ESwitchData_T....................................................................................................................................3-34 3.8.7 IPSwitchData_T...................................................................................................................................3-34 3.9 HW_mstpInventory.......................................................................................................................................3-35 3.9.1 HW_MSTPEndPoint_T.......................................................................................................................3-36 3.9.2 HW_VirtualBridge_T...........................................................................................................................3-36 3.9.3 HW_VirtualLAN_T.............................................................................................................................3-37 3.9.4 HW_ForwardEndPoint_T....................................................................................................................3-37 3.9.5 HW_MSTPBindingPath_T..................................................................................................................3-38 3.9.6 HW_QosRule_T...................................................................................................................................3-38 3.9.7 HW_Flow_T.........................................................................................................................................3-39 3.9.8 HW_LinkAggregationGroup_T...........................................................................................................3-40 3.9.9 HW_LAGBranchPort _T.....................................................................................................................3-41 3.9.10 HW_SpanningTree_T........................................................................................................................3-41 3.9.11 HW_STCurrentPort_T.......................................................................................................................3-41 3.9.12 ShapingQueue....................................................................................................................................3-42 3.10 HW_mstpProtection....................................................................................................................................3-42 3.10.1 HW_RPRNode_T...............................................................................................................................3-42 3.10.2 HW_RPRTopoInfo_T........................................................................................................................3-43 3.10.3 HW_RPRSwitchData_T.....................................................................................................................3-44 3.10.4 HW_AtmProtectGroup_T..................................................................................................................3-45 3.10.5 HW_AtmServiceProtectPair_T..........................................................................................................3-46 3.10.6 HW_AtmPGSwitchData_T................................................................................................................3-46 3.10.7 HW_AtmPGSingleEndSwitchPara_T................................................................................................3-47 3.11 HW_mstpService........................................................................................................................................3-47 3.11.1 HW_EthServiceTP_T.........................................................................................................................3-47 3.11.2 HW_EthService_T.............................................................................................................................3-47 Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. ix
Contents
iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration) 3.11.3 HW_EthServiceCreateData_T...........................................................................................................3-48 3.11.4 HW_AtmService_T............................................................................................................................3-49 3.11.5 HW_AtmServiceCreateData_T..........................................................................................................3-50 3.11.6 HW_AtmServiceTP_T.......................................................................................................................3-50
3.12 trafficDescriptor..........................................................................................................................................3-50 3.12.1 TrafficDescriptor_T...........................................................................................................................3-51 3.12.2 TDCreateData_T................................................................................................................................3-51 3.13 encapsulationLayerLink..............................................................................................................................3-52 3.13.1 EncapsulationLayerLink_T................................................................................................................3-52 3.13.2 ELLinkCreateData_T.........................................................................................................................3-53 3.14 flowDomain.................................................................................................................................................3-54 3.14.1 FlowDomain_T..................................................................................................................................3-54 3.14.2 FlowDomainFragment_T...................................................................................................................3-55 3.14.3 FDFrCreateData_T.............................................................................................................................3-56 3.14.4 EthernetOAMPoint_T........................................................................................................................3-57 3.14.5 EthernetOAMOperation_T.................................................................................................................3-57 3.14.6 EthernetOAMParamer_T...................................................................................................................3-58 3.14.7 EthernetLTTestResult_T....................................................................................................................3-58 3.15 HW_controlPlane........................................................................................................................................3-58 3.15.1 HW_SnppLink_T...............................................................................................................................3-58 3.15.2 HW_Capacity_T.................................................................................................................................3-60 3.16 maintenanceOps..........................................................................................................................................3-60 3.16.1 CurrentMaintenanceOperation_T.......................................................................................................3-60 3.16.2 PRBSTestResult_T.............................................................................................................................3-61 3.16.3 PRBSTestParameter_T.......................................................................................................................3-61 3.16.4 SampleResult_T.................................................................................................................................3-61 3.16.5 TestDuration_T..................................................................................................................................3-62 3.17 TopoManagementManager.........................................................................................................................3-62 3.17.1 Node_T...............................................................................................................................................3-62 3.17.2 Position_T..........................................................................................................................................3-62 3.18 HW_vpnManager........................................................................................................................................3-62 3.18.1 MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T........................................................................................................3-63 3.18.2 MultipointServiceAttr_T....................................................................................................................3-64 3.18.3 StaticMacAddress_T..........................................................................................................................3-66 3.18.4 SplitHorizonGroup_T.........................................................................................................................3-66 3.18.5 IPCrossConnection_T........................................................................................................................3-66 3.18.6 TrafficTrunk_T...................................................................................................................................3-67 3.18.7 RouteConstraint_T.............................................................................................................................3-68 3.18.8 MFDFrModifyData_T........................................................................................................................3-69 3.18.9 TrafficTrunkCreateData_T.................................................................................................................3-70 3.18.10 TrafficTrunkModifyData_T.............................................................................................................3-71 3.19 trafficConditioningProfile...........................................................................................................................3-72 x Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Contents
3.19.1 HW_TCProfile_T...............................................................................................................................3-73 3.19.2 HW_TCProfileCreateData_T.............................................................................................................3-74 3.19.3 TrafficConditioningProfileAssign_T.................................................................................................3-75 3.19.4 TrafficConditioningProfileDeassign_T..............................................................................................3-75
4 Interface Model...........................................................................................................................4-1
4.1 Common_I.......................................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.1 setUserLabel...........................................................................................................................................4-2 4.1.2 setnativeEMSName................................................................................................................................4-3 4.1.3 setOwner.................................................................................................................................................4-4 4.1.4 Notification.............................................................................................................................................4-5 4.2 EquipmentInventoryMgr_I..............................................................................................................................4-5 4.2.1 provisionEquipment...............................................................................................................................4-6 4.2.2 unprovisionEquipment...........................................................................................................................4-7 4.2.3 Notifications...........................................................................................................................................4-7 4.3 ManagedElementMgr_I.................................................................................................................................. 4-8 4.3.1 setTPData...............................................................................................................................................4-8 4.3.2 createCrossConnections.........................................................................................................................4-9 4.3.3 This interface is in the best-effort mode.deleteCrossConnections.......................................................4-11 4.3.4 activateCrossConnections....................................................................................................................4-12 4.3.5 deactivateCrossConnections.................................................................................................................4-13 4.3.6 createFTP.............................................................................................................................................4-15 4.3.7 deleteFTP.............................................................................................................................................4-16 4.3.8 modifyFTPMembers............................................................................................................................4-17 4.3.9 Notifications.........................................................................................................................................4-18 4.4 MultiLayerSubnetworkMgr_I.......................................................................................................................4-19 4.4.1 createSNC.............................................................................................................................................4-20 4.4.2 modifySNC...........................................................................................................................................4-22 4.4.3 activateSNC..........................................................................................................................................4-24 4.4.4 createAndActivateSNC........................................................................................................................4-26 4.4.5 deactivateSNC......................................................................................................................................4-28 4.4.6 deleteSNC.............................................................................................................................................4-29 4.4.7 deactivateAndDeleteSNC.....................................................................................................................4-30 4.4.8 checkValidSNC....................................................................................................................................4-32 4.4.9 setConjunctionSNC..............................................................................................................................4-33 4.4.10 swapSNC............................................................................................................................................4-34 4.4.11 Notifications.......................................................................................................................................4-36 4.5 ProtectionMgr_I............................................................................................................................................4-36 4.5.1 performProtectionCommand................................................................................................................4-36 4.5.2 performWDMProtectionCommand......................................................................................................4-38 4.5.3 Notifications.........................................................................................................................................4-39 4.6 HW_MSTPInventoryMgr_I..........................................................................................................................4-39 4.6.1 setMstpEndPoint..................................................................................................................................4-40 Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xi
Contents
iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration) 4.6.2 createVirtualBridge..............................................................................................................................4-41 4.6.3 deleteVirtualBridge..............................................................................................................................4-42 4.6.4 createVLAN.........................................................................................................................................4-43 4.6.5 deleteVLAN.........................................................................................................................................4-44 4.6.6 addVLANForwardPort.........................................................................................................................4-45 4.6.7 delVLANForwardPort..........................................................................................................................4-46 4.6.8 setVLANData.......................................................................................................................................4-47 4.6.9 addBindingPath....................................................................................................................................4-48 4.6.10 delBindingPath...................................................................................................................................4-49 4.6.11 setLCASState.....................................................................................................................................4-50 4.6.12 createQosRule....................................................................................................................................4-51 4.6.13 setQosRule.........................................................................................................................................4-52 4.6.14 createFlow..........................................................................................................................................4-53 4.6.15 deleteQosRule....................................................................................................................................4-54 4.6.16 setFlow...............................................................................................................................................4-55 4.6.17 deleteFlow..........................................................................................................................................4-56 4.6.18 createLinkAggregationGroup.............................................................................................................4-57 4.6.19 modifyLinkAggregationGroup...........................................................................................................4-58 4.6.20 deleteLinkAggregationGroup.............................................................................................................4-59 4.6.21 setMstpEndPointShapingQueue.........................................................................................................4-60 4.6.22 setSTProtocolParam...........................................................................................................................4-61 4.6.23 setSTBridgeParam..............................................................................................................................4-62 4.6.24 setSTPortParam..................................................................................................................................4-63 4.6.25 Notifications.......................................................................................................................................4-64
4.7 HW_MSTPProtectionMgr_I.........................................................................................................................4-64 4.7.1 performRPRProtectionCommand........................................................................................................4-64 4.7.2 performAtmPGProtectionCommand....................................................................................................4-65 4.7.3 Notifications.........................................................................................................................................4-66 4.8 HW_MSTPServiceMgr_I..............................................................................................................................4-67 4.8.1 createEthService...................................................................................................................................4-67 4.8.2 deleteEthService...................................................................................................................................4-68 4.8.3 createAtmService.................................................................................................................................4-69 4.8.4 deleteAtmService.................................................................................................................................4-70 4.8.5 activateAtmService..............................................................................................................................4-71 4.8.6 deactivateAtmService...........................................................................................................................4-72 4.8.7 Notifications.........................................................................................................................................4-73 4.9 TrafficDescriptorMgr_I.................................................................................................................................4-73 4.9.1 activateTrafficDescriptor......................................................................................................................4-73 4.9.2 deactivateTrafficDescriptor..................................................................................................................4-74 4.9.3 HW_createTrafficDescriptor................................................................................................................4-75 4.9.4 deleteTrafficDescriptor........................................................................................................................4-76 4.9.5 Notifications.........................................................................................................................................4-77 xii Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Contents
4.10 HW_controlPlaneMgr_I..............................................................................................................................4-77 4.10.1 setSRLG.............................................................................................................................................4-78 4.10.2 Notifications.......................................................................................................................................4-79 4.11 EncapsulationLayerLinkMgr_I...................................................................................................................4-79 4.11.1 createELLink......................................................................................................................................4-79 4.11.2 activateELLink...................................................................................................................................4-80 4.11.3 deactivateELLink...............................................................................................................................4-81 4.11.4 deleteELLink......................................................................................................................................4-82 4.11.5 increaseBandwidthOfELLink.............................................................................................................4-83 4.11.6 decreaseBandwidthOfELLink............................................................................................................4-84 4.11.7 setELLinkLCASState.........................................................................................................................4-86 4.11.8 Notifications.......................................................................................................................................4-86 4.12 FlowDomainMgr_I......................................................................................................................................4-87 4.12.1 createFDFr..........................................................................................................................................4-87 4.12.2 activateFDFr.......................................................................................................................................4-89 4.12.3 deactivateFDFr...................................................................................................................................4-90 4.12.4 deleteFDFr..........................................................................................................................................4-91 4.12.5 performEthernetOAMCommand.......................................................................................................4-92 4.12.6 Notifications.......................................................................................................................................4-92 4.13 MaintenanceMgr_I......................................................................................................................................4-93 4.13.1 performMaintenanceOperation..........................................................................................................4-93 4.13.2 enablePRBSTest.................................................................................................................................4-94 4.13.3 disablePRBSTest................................................................................................................................4-95 4.14 TCProfileMgr_I...........................................................................................................................................4-96 4.14.1 HW_createTCProfile..........................................................................................................................4-96 4.14.2 HW_modifyTCProfile........................................................................................................................4-97 4.14.3 deleteTCProfile..................................................................................................................................4-99 4.14.4 assignTrafficConditioningProfile.....................................................................................................4-100 4.14.5 deassignTrafficConditioningProfile.................................................................................................4-101 4.15 Session_I...................................................................................................................................................4-102 4.15.1 ping...................................................................................................................................................4-102 4.15.2 endSession........................................................................................................................................4-102 4.16 HW_securityMgr_I...................................................................................................................................4-103 4.16.1 modifyPassword...............................................................................................................................4-103 4.17 HW_VPNMgr_I........................................................................................................................................4-103 4.17.1 createMFDFr....................................................................................................................................4-104 4.17.2 deleteMFDFr....................................................................................................................................4-105 4.17.3 activateMFDFr.................................................................................................................................4-106 4.17.4 deactivateMFDFr.............................................................................................................................4-107 4.17.5 modifyMFDFr..................................................................................................................................4-108 4.17.6 createTrafficTrunk............................................................................................................................4-110 4.17.7 deleteTrafficTrunk...........................................................................................................................4-110 Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xiii
Contents
iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration) 4.17.8 activateTrafficTrunk.........................................................................................................................4-111 4.17.9 deactivateTrafficTrunk.....................................................................................................................4-112 4.17.10 modifyTrafficTrunk.......................................................................................................................4-113 4.17.11 createIPCrossConnections..............................................................................................................4-114 4.17.12 deleteIPCrossConnections..............................................................................................................4-115 4.17.13 activateIPCrossConnections...........................................................................................................4-116 4.17.14 deactivateIPCrossConnections.......................................................................................................4-117 4.17.15 modifyIPCrossConnection.............................................................................................................4-118
A Object Naming Rules..............................................................................................................A-1

A.1 EMS...............................................................................................................................................................A-3 A.2 Subnetwork....................................................................................................................................................A-3 A.3 TopoSubnetwork...........................................................................................................................................A-4 A.4 ProtectionSubnetwork...................................................................................................................................A-4 A.5 SubnetworkConnection.................................................................................................................................A-4 A.6 ManagedElement...........................................................................................................................................A-5 A.7 TopologicalLink............................................................................................................................................A-5 A.8 EPGP.............................................................................................................................................................A-6 A.9 PTP................................................................................................................................................................A-6 A.10 FTP..............................................................................................................................................................A-8 A.11 CTP..............................................................................................................................................................A-9 A.12 TrafficDescriptor.......................................................................................................................................A-14 A.13 EquipmentHolder......................................................................................................................................A-14 A.14 Equipment..................................................................................................................................................A-15 A.15 ProtectionGroup........................................................................................................................................A-15 A.16 WDM ProtectionGroup.............................................................................................................................A-16 A.17 VirtualBridge.............................................................................................................................................A-16 A.18 VLAN........................................................................................................................................................A-17 A.19 Ethernet Service.........................................................................................................................................A-17 A.20 ATM Service.............................................................................................................................................A-18 A.21 ATM ProtectGroup....................................................................................................................................A-18 A.22 QoS Rule...................................................................................................................................................A-19 A.23 Flow...........................................................................................................................................................A-19 A.24 Flow Domain.............................................................................................................................................A-20 A.25 FlowDomainFragment...............................................................................................................................A-20 A.26 EncapsulationLayerLink............................................................................................................................A-21 A.27 LinkAggregationGroup.............................................................................................................................A-21 A.28 RPRNode...................................................................................................................................................A-21 A.29 Routing Area.............................................................................................................................................A-22 A.30 SNPPLink..................................................................................................................................................A-22 A.31 MatrixFlowDomainFragment....................................................................................................................A-23 A.32 TrafficTrunk..............................................................................................................................................A-23 A.33 IPCrossConnection....................................................................................................................................A-24 xiv Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Contents
A.34 tcProfileName............................................................................................................................................A-24
B AdditionalInfo Description....................................................................................................B-1
B.1 ManagedElement_T.......................................................................................................................................B-2 B.2 TerminationPoint_T.......................................................................................................................................B-3 B.3 Equipment_T..................................................................................................................................................B-4 B.4 SubnetworkConnection_T.............................................................................................................................B-4 B.5 SNCCreateData_T.........................................................................................................................................B-5 B.6 SNCModifyData_T........................................................................................................................................B-6 B.7 CrossConnect_T.............................................................................................................................................B-7 B.8 HW_EthService_T.......................................................................................................................................B-10 B.9 TrafficDescriptor_T.....................................................................................................................................B-11 B.10 EthernetOAMOperation_T........................................................................................................................B-11 B.11 ELLinkCreateData_T.................................................................................................................................B-12 B.12 FDFrCreateData_T....................................................................................................................................B-12
C Lists.............................................................................................................................................C-1
C.1 Notification Event Samples...........................................................................................................................C-2 C.1.1 NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event Sample...........................................................................................C-2 C.1.2 NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event Sample...........................................................................................C-4 C.1.3 NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event Sample.......................................................................C-5 C.1.4 NT_STATE_CHANGE Event Sample.................................................................................................C-6 C.1.5 NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample......................................................................................C-6 C.1.6 NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample.............................................................................C-8 C.1.7 NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample...........................................................................C-9 C.1.8 NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample............................................................................C-10 C.1.9 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample.................................................................................C-11 C.1.10 NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event Sample.......................................................................C-13 C.1.11 NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event Sample.......................................................................................C-13 C.1.12 NT_HEARTBEAT Event Sample....................................................................................................C-14 C.1.13 NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event Sample............................................................................................C-15 C.1.14 NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample..............................................................................C-18 C.2 IDL Description...........................................................................................................................................C-19
D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1 E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
xv
Tables
Tables
Table 1-1 Configuration management..................................................................................................................1-2 Table 2-1 Header format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION event......................................................................2-2 Table 2-2 Format of the fiterrable_data in the structure of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION event......................2-2 Table 2-3 Header format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION event......................................................................2-4 Table 2-4 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION event..................................2-4 Table 2-5 Header format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event..................................................2-5 Table 2-6 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event..............2-6 Table 2-7 Header format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE event...........................................................................2-7 Table 2-8 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_STATE_CHANGE event.......................................2-8 Table 2-9 Header format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event................................................................2-9 Table 2-10 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event........................2-10 Table 2-11 Header format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event...................................................2-13 Table 2-12 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event...............2-13 Table 2-13 Header format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event..................................................2-14 Table 2-14 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event..............2-15 Table 2-15 Header format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event.....................................................2-17 Table 2-16 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event.................2-17 Table 2-17 Header format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event..........................................................2-19 Table 2-18 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event......................2-19 Table 2-19 Header format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH event.........................................................2-21 Table 2-20 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH event.....................2-21 Table 2-21 Header format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event......................................................................2-23 Table 2-22 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event...................................2-23 Table 2-23 Header format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event..................................................2-24 Table 2-24 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event..............2-25 Table 2-25 Header format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS event......................................................2-26 Table 2-26 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS event...................2-27 Table 2-27 Header format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS event..................................................................2-28 Table 2-28 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS event..............................2-29 Table 2-29 Header format of the NT_HEARTBEAT event...............................................................................2-30 Table 2-30 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_HEARTBEAT event...........................................2-30 Table A-1 EMS....................................................................................................................................................A-3 Table A-2 Subnetwork.........................................................................................................................................A-3 Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. xvii
Tables
iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration) Table A-3 TopoSubnetwork................................................................................................................................A-4 Table A-4 ProtectionSubnetwork........................................................................................................................A-4 Table A-5 SubnetworkConnection......................................................................................................................A-4 Table A-6 ManagedElement................................................................................................................................A-5 Table A-7 TopologicalLink.................................................................................................................................A-5 Table A-8 EPGP..................................................................................................................................................A-6 Table A-9 PTP.....................................................................................................................................................A-6 Table A-10 FTP...................................................................................................................................................A-8 Table A-11 CTP...................................................................................................................................................A-9 Table A-12 TrafficDescriptor............................................................................................................................A-14 Table A-13 EquipmentHolder...........................................................................................................................A-14 Table A-14 Equipment......................................................................................................................................A-15 Table A-15 ProtectionGroup.............................................................................................................................A-15 Table A-16 WDM ProtectionGroup..................................................................................................................A-16 Table A-17 VirtualBridge..................................................................................................................................A-16 Table A-18 VLAN.............................................................................................................................................A-17 Table A-19 Ethernet Service.............................................................................................................................A-17 Table A-20 ATM Service..................................................................................................................................A-18 Table A-21 ATM ProtectGroup.........................................................................................................................A-18 Table A-22 QoS Rule........................................................................................................................................A-19 Table A-23 Flow................................................................................................................................................A-19 Table A-24 Flow Domain..................................................................................................................................A-20 Table A-25 FlowDomainFragment....................................................................................................................A-20 Table A-26 EncapsulationLayerLink................................................................................................................A-21 Table A-27 LinkAggregationGroup..................................................................................................................A-21 Table A-28 RPRNode........................................................................................................................................A-21 Table A-29 Routing Area..................................................................................................................................A-22 Table A-30 SNPPLink.......................................................................................................................................A-22 Table B-1 ManagedElement_T............................................................................................................................B-2 Table B-2 TerminationPoint_T............................................................................................................................B-3 Table B-3 Equipment_T......................................................................................................................................B-4 Table B-4 SubnetworkConnection_T..................................................................................................................B-4 Table B-5 SNCCreateData_T..............................................................................................................................B-5 Table B-6 SNCModifyData_T.............................................................................................................................B-6 Table B-7 CrossConnect_T..................................................................................................................................B-7 Table B-8 HW_EthService_T............................................................................................................................B-10 Table B-9 TrafficDescriptor_T..........................................................................................................................B-11 Table B-10 EthernetOAMOperation_T.............................................................................................................B-11 Table B-11 ELLinkCreateData_T......................................................................................................................B-12 Table B-12 FDFrCreateData_T.........................................................................................................................B-12 Table C-1 NT_OBJECT_CREATION event sample..........................................................................................C-2 Table C-2 NT_OBJECT_DELETION event sample..........................................................................................C-4
xviii
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Tables
Table C-3 NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event sample......................................................................C-5 Table C-4 NT_STATE_CHANGE event sample................................................................................................C-6 Table C-5 NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event sample.....................................................................................C-6 Table C-6 NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample............................................................................C-8 Table C-7 NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample..........................................................................C-9 Table C-8 NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample...........................................................................C-10 Table C-9 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample................................................................................C-11 Table C-10 NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event sample......................................................................C-13 Table C-11 NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS event sample......................................................................................C-13 Table C-12 NT_HEARTBEAT event sample...................................................................................................C-14 Table C-13 NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event sample...........................................................................................C-15 Table C-14 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample..............................................................................C-18
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
xix
1 Overview
1
About This Chapter
1.1 Introduction 1.2 Configuration Management
Overview
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
1-1
1 Overview
1.1 Introduction
Huawei CORBA interface provides extensive functions of network resource configuration for the operation support system (OSS). With these interfaces, a user can maintain a network, configure equipment resources, deliver end-to-end services, and deliver the services of individual NEs. In this way, the network resources are managed flexibly.
1.2 Configuration Management

The U2000 CORBA NBI provides the configuration management functions listed in Table 1-1.
NOTE
Unless otherwise specified, the NA equipment does not support the following functions.
Table 1-1 Configuration management Function Network maintenance The user can set loopback (LB) and alarm insertion and perform pseudo-random binary sequence (PRBS) tests. The user can perform operations, administration and maintenance (OAM) of Ethernet services. The user can install and delete boards. The user can set port parameters, binding paths for Ethernet ports, and attributes of the IF ports of the RTN. The user can perform multiplex section protection (MSP) switching and wavelength division multiplexing (WDM) protection switching. The user can also create link aggregation protection groups. The user can perform LB test, LT test, and continuity check (CC) of Ethernet services.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Description
Test and diagnosis
Equipment configuration Port configuration
Protection configuration
Service diagnosis
1-2
1 Overview
Function Delivery of end-to-end SDH services The user can perform the following operations:
l
Description SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy
Create, delete, activate, deactivate, and modify SDH trails. Perform switching of preconfigured SDH trails. WDM: Wave-length Division Multiplexing
Delivery of end-to-end WDM services
The user can create, delete, activate, and deactivate WDM trails. The user can also modify the source and sink of WDM trails. The user can perform the following operations:
l
Delivery of end-to-end SDH ASON services
ASON: automatically switched optical network
Create, delete, activate, and deactivate SDH ASON trails. Modify routing constraints of SDH ASON trails. Set association of SDH ASON trails. Set shared risk link groups of SDH ASON.
l
Delivery of end-to-end Ethernet services
The user can perform the following operations:

l
FDFr: flow domain fragment ELL: encapsulation layer link
Create, delete, activate and deactivate a FDFr. Create, delete, activate, and deactivate an ELL. Adjust the bandwidth bound to an ELL.
Delivery of end-to-end RTN services Delivery of SDH services of individual NEs
The user can create and delete SDH or PDH radio links. The user can create, delete, activate, and deactivate SDH cross-connections.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
1-3
1 Overview
Function Delivery of MSTP services of individual NEs The user can perform the following operations:
l
Description
l
MSTP: multi-service transmission platform ATM: asynchronous transfer mode
Create and delete the Ethernet services of individual NEs. Create an Ethernet virtual bridge. Create an L2 forwarding table for Ethernet. Create, activate, deactivate, and delete the ATM services of individual NEs. Create, delete, activate, and deactivate an ATM traffic descriptor.
Delivery of PTN services of individual NEs
The user can perform the following operations:

l
Create, activate, deactivate, delete MPLS static tunnel. Create, activate, deactivate, delete MPLS dynamic tunnel. Create, activate, deactivate, delete IP tunnel. Create, activate, deactivate, delete PW switch. Create, activate, deactivate, delete AES service. Create, activate, deactivate, delete CES service. Create, activate, deactivate, delete EPL service. Create, activate, deactivate, delete EPLn service.
1-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
1 Overview
Function Delivery of OTN services of individual NEs The user can perform the following operations:
l
Description
Create, delete, activate, deactivate WDM crossconnections. Create, modify, delete OTN trails. Create, modify, delete, perform OTN protection group.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
1-5
2 Format of Notification Events
2
About This Chapter
Format of Notification Events
In the additionalInfoUsage.pdf and AVC_SC_Notifications.pdf among the supporting documentation of the TMF 814 recommendation, the structure of each notification event of the CORBA interface is described. This chapter presents the detailed definitions of the structure of the notification events. 2.1 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event 2.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event 2.3 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event 2.4 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event 2.5 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.6 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.7 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.8 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.9 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.10 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.11 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event 2.12 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event 2.13 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event 2.14 Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event 2.15 Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-1
2.1 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event

2.1.1 Header Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event 2.1.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event (filterable_data) 2.1.3 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event (remainder_of_body)
2.1.1 Header Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event

Table 2-1 Header format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_OBJECT_ CREATION. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.1.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-2 Format of the fiterrable_data in the structure of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION event Name notificationId Type String Description Unique ID of the notification event.
2-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Name objectName objectType objectTypeQualifier
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications::ObjectType_T String
Description Name of the object created. Type of the object created. Type of the reported event. This field is applicable to only the object types added in TMF V3.0. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. If the event relates to a PTP that is an edge point or to a protection group containing a PTP that is an edge point, the value is true. Otherwise, the value is false.
emsTime neTime
globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T
edgePointRelated
boolean
2.1.3 Format of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_OBJECT_CREATION event is the information model for creating an object. For details, see 3 Information Model.
2.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event

2.2.1 Header Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event 2.2.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event (filterable_data) 2.2.3 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event (remainder_of_body)
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-3
2.2.1 Header Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event

Table 2-3 Header format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_OBJECT_ DELETION. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.2.2 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-4 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION event Name notificationId objectName objectType Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications::ObjectType_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the deleted object. Type of the deleted object. This field is used for only the object types defined in TMF V2.1 and the earlier versions. Type of the reported event. This field is applicable to only the object types added in TMF V3.0.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
objectTypeQualifier
string
2-4
Name emsTime neTime
Type globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T
Description Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. If the event relates to a PTP that is an edge point or to a protection group containing a PTP that is an edge point, the value is true. Otherwise, the value is false.
edgePointRelated
boolean
2.2.3 Format of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_OBJECT_DELETION event is always null. When you delete a cross-connection object, you need to fill in the details of the cross-connection.
2.3 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event

2.3.1 Header Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event 2.3.2 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data) 2.3.3 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)
2.3.1 Header Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event

Table 2-5 Header format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type Description
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-5
Event Header Type
Name Level-1 Name Level-2 Name type_name
Type
Description
string
Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_ATTRIBU TE_VALUE_ CHANGE. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event.
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.3.2 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-6 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event Name notificationId objectName objectType Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications::ObjectType_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the object of which attributes change. Type of the object of which attributes change. This parameter is used for only the object types defined in TMF V2.1 and the earlier versions. Type of the reported event. This field is applicable to only the object types added in TMF V3.0. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event.
objectTypeQualifier
string
emsTime
globaldefs::Time_T
2-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Name neTime
Type globaldefs::Time_T
Description Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. If the event relates to a PTP that is an edge point or to a protection group containing a PTP that is an edge point, the value is true. Otherwise, the value is false. List of changed attributes.
edgePointRelated
boolean
attributeList
notifications::NVList_T
2.3.3 Format of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event is always null.
2.4 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event

2.4.1 Header Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event 2.4.2 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data) 2.4.3 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)
2.4.1 Header Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event

Table 2-7 Header format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_STATE_C HANGE. Type Description
type_name
string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-7
Event Header Type
Name Level-1 Name event_name Level-2 Name
Type
Description
string
Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event.
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.4.2 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-8 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_STATE_CHANGE event Name notificationId objectName objectType Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications::ObjectType_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the object of which the state changes. Type of the object of which the state changes. This parameter is used for only the object types defined in TMF V2.1 and the earlier versions. Type of the reported event. This field is applicable to only the object types added in TMF V3.0. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. If the event relates to a PTP that is an edge point or to a protection group containing a PTP that is an edge point, the value is true. Otherwise, the value is false. List of the values of changed states.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
objectTypeQualifier
string
emsTime neTime
edgePointRelated
boolean
attributeList
2-8
2.4.3 Format of the NT_STATE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_STATE_CHANGE event is always null. When you delete a cross-connection object, you need to fill in the details of the cross-connection. For details of the cross-connection, see 3.4.1 CrossConnect_T.
2.5 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event

2.5.1 Header Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.5.2 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data) 2.5.3 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)
2.5.1 Header Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event

Table 2-9 Header format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_PROTEC TION_SWITC H. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-9
2.5.2 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-10 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event Name notificationId emsTime neTime Type string globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. Protection type. Reason why the switching occurs. Layer rate that the switching is associated to. Name of the protection group where the switching occurs. If the protection type is SNCP, this field is an empty name can be reported.
ProtectionType switchReason layerRate groupName
protection::ProtectionType_ T protection::switchReason_T transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
2-10
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Name protectedTP
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
Description Protected TP when the switching occurs. For SNCP, the value is always the reliable TP. For a notification of two-fiber BLSR switching, the value is the TP that is inactive during the switching. For a notification of four-fiber MSP ring switching, the value is the working TP that is inactive during the switching. For a notification of 1:N MSP switching, the value is the working TP for which the protection switching occurs. For a notification of revertive 1+1 MSP switching, the value is the working TP. For a notification of nonrevertive 1+1 MSP switching, the value is the TP that was active before the switching (After the switching, the protected TP changes). Source TP that is switched away from. For two-fiber MSP switching, the value is the TP that is switched. For four-fiber MSP ring switching, the value is one of the TPs in the MSP 1:N protection groups (working or protection). For four-fiber ring switching, the value is the working TP of the span that is switched. For example, if the east span switches to the west span, the value is the east working TP. Destination TP that is switched to. This TP is the source TP that is activated after the switching or the current active TP if no protection switching occurs
switchAwayFromTP
globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
switchToTP
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-11
Name nativeEMSName
Type string
Description Name of the protection group where the protection switching occurs. Additional information about the protection switching event, currently including the type of the equipment where the switching occurs (indicated by ProductName) and the information about the protected board (indicated by protectedEquipmentName), source board (indicated by switchAwayFromEquipmentName), and sink board (indicated by switchToEquipmentName).
additionalInfo
NOTE
BLSR: bidirectional line switched ring additionalInfo in the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event structure of the U2000 CORBA interface is an extended field. This field stores the type of the equipment where the protection switching occurs.
2.5.3 Format of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event is always null.
2.6 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

2.6.1 Header Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.6.2 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data) 2.6.3 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)
2-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2.6.1 Header Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

Table 2-11 Header format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_ATMPRO TECTION_S WITCH. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.6.2 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-12 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event Name notificationId emsTime neTime Type string globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-13
Name pgName
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T SwitchMode_T HW_mstpProtection::HW_ AtmProtectType_T HW_mstpProtection::HW_ AtmPGSingleEndSwitchPar a_T
Description Name of the ATM protection group where the switching occurs. Switching mode. Protection type. Parameters of the source-end switching. This field describes the reason, the state and other information about the source-end switching. Parameters of the sink-end switching. This field describes the reason, the state and other information about the sink-end switching.
switchMode protectType srcEndSwitchPara
snkEndSwitchPara
HW_mstpProtection::HW_ AtmPGSingleEndSwitchPar a_T
2.6.3 Format of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event is always null.
2.7 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

2.7.1 Header Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.7.2 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data) 2.7.3 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)
2.7.1 Header Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

Table 2-13 Header format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Type
Description
2-14
Event Header Type
Name Level-1 Name Level-2 Name type_name
Type
Description
string
Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_WDMPR OTECTION_S WITCH. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event.
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.7.2 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-14 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event Name notificationId emsTime neTime Type string globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. Type of the protection group. Reason why the switching occurs. Name of the protection group where the switching occurs. Name of the protected TP during the switching.
protectionGroupType switchReason groupName protectedTP
protection::WDMProtection Group_T protection::switchReason_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-15
Name switchAwayFromTP switchToTP nativeEMSName
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string
Description Name of the source TP that is switched away from. Name of the destination TP that is switched to. Information about the WDM protection group where the switching occurs. Additional information about the protection switching event, currently including the type of the equipment where the switching occurs (indicated by ProductName) and the information about the protected board (indicated by protectedEquipmentName), source board (indicated by switchAwayFromEquipmentName), and sink board (indicated by switchToEquipmentName).
additionalInfo
NOTE
additionalInfo in the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event structure of the U2000 CORBA interface is an extended field. This field stores the type of the equipment where the WDM protection switching occurs.
2.7.3 Format of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event is always null.
2.8 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

2.8.1 Header Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.8.2 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data) 2.8.3 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)
2-16
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2.8.1 Header Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

Table 2-15 Header format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_RPRPRO TECTION_S WITCH. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.8.2 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-16 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event Name notificationId emsTime neTime Type string globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-17
Name nodeName switchState switchReason switchPosition switchParameters
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T HW_SwitchState_T protection::SwitchReason_T HW_SwitchPosition_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Name of the node. Switching state. Switching cause. Switching position. switchParameters supports the following parameters: switchPosition switchState protectType SwitchCountTimes ProtectCountTime LastSwitchCommand The parameters for switchParameters in a HW_RPRSwitchData_T structure contain east and west switching parameters.
2.8.3 Format of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event is always null.
2.9 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

2.9.1 Header Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.9.2 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data) 2.9.3 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)
2-18
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2.9.1 Header Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

Table 2-17 Header format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_EPROTE CTION_SWIT CH. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.9.2 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-18 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event Name notificationId emsTime neTime Type string globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. Type of the reported equipment protection group.
eProtectionGroupType
protection::EProtectionGrou pType_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-19
Name eSwitchReason groupName
Type protection::ESwitchReason_ T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
Description Reason why the switching occurs. Name of the equipment group where the switching occurs. Protected equipment during the switching. For an m:n protection group, the protected equipment is the working equipment during the switching. Source equipment that is switched away from. Destination equipment that is switched to. Detailed information about the equipment protection group where the switching occurs. Additional information, currently including the type of the equipment where the equipment protection switching occurs (indicated by ProductName) and the information about the protected board (indicated by protectedEquipmentName), source board (indicated by switchAwayFromEquipmentName), and sink board (indicated by switchToEquipmentName).
protectedE
switchAwayFromE switchToE nativeEMSName
globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string
additionalInfo
globaldefs::NVSList_T
NOTE
additionalInfo in the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event structure of the U2000 CORBA interface is an extended field. This field stores the information about the type of equipment where the protection switching occurs.
2.9.3 Format of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event is always null.
2-20 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2.10 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

2.10.1 Header Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event 2.10.2 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data) 2.10.3 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)
2.10.1 Header Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event

Table 2-19 Header format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_IPPROTE CTION_SWIT CH. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.10.2 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-20 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH event Name notificationId Type string Description Unique ID of the notification event.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-21
Name emsTime neTime
Type globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T
Description Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null. Type of a tunnel APS protection group. Cause of the switching. Name of a tunnel APS protection group where the switching occurs. List of tunnels under protection where the switching occurs. List of source tunnels where the switching occurs. List of destination tunnels where the switching occurs. Details about a tunnel APS protection group where the switching occurs. Additional information. Currently, this field is null.
protectionType switchReason groupName
string SwitchReason_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T string
protectedList
switchAwayFromList switchToList nativeEMSName
additionalInfo
2.10.3 Format of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH event is always null.
2.11 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event

2.11.1 Header Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event 2.11.2 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data) 2.11.3 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)
2-22
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2.11.1 Header Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event

Table 2-21 Header format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_ROUTE_ CHANGE. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.11.2 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-22 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event Name notificationId objectName objectType emsTime neTime Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications::ObjectType_T globaldefs::Time_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the object that reports the event. Type of the object that reports the event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null.
2-23
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Name routeChangeEvent
Type subnetworkConnection::Rer outeChangeEvent_T
Description Status information during the route change. The value is RerouteStarted, RerouteCompleted or RerouteFailed.
route
subnetworkConnection::Rou te_T
Detailed information about the new route.
2.11.3 Format of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event is always null.
2.12 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event

2.12.1 Header Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event 2.12.2 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data) 2.12.3 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)
2.12.1 Header Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event

Table 2-23 Header format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_ASON_R ESOURCE_C HANGE.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Type
Description
type_name
string
2-24
Event Header Type
Type
Description
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.12.2 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-24 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event Name notificationId objectName objectTypeQualifier Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the object that reports the event. Object (ASON domain or ASON node) of the reported event. The value is ROUTING_AREA or ROUTING_NODE. notifyType string Type (creation or deletion) of the reported event. The value is OBJECT_CREATE or OBJECT_DELETE. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event. Time (UTC) of the event reported by the NE. If the NE does not report the time, the value is null.
emsTime neTime
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-25
Name edgePointRelated
Type boolean
Description If the event relates to a PTP that is an edge point or to a protection group containing a PTP that is an edge point, the value is true. Otherwise, the value is false.
2.12.3 Format of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event is always null.
2.13 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event

2.13.1 Header Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event 2.13.2 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event (filterable_data) 2.13.3 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event (remainder_of_body)
2.13.1 Header Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event

Table 2-25 Header format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_FILE_TR ANSFER_STA TUS. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
2-26
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Event Header Type variable_header
Name Level-1 Name Timeout Level-2 Name
Type
Description
string
Timeout period of a notification event.
2.13.2 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-26 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS event Name notificationId filename Type string string Description Unique ID of the notification event. File directory and file name that are entered. For example, /tmp/alarm4.txt. Transfer status. When transfer fails, the value is FT_FAILED. When transfer is completed, the value is FT_COMPLETED. When transfer is in process, the value is FT_IN_PROGRESS. percentComplete string Progress of the transfer expressed in percentage. The value ranges from 0 to 100. For example, 100 percent.
transferStatu
string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-27
Name failureReason
Type string
Description Cause of the file transfer failure. When the transfer succeeds, the value is null. When the transfer fails, details of the failure are described. For example, when the IP address is incorrect, the message "connection to 10.71.227.26 failed" is displayed. When the user name or password is incorrect, the message "530 Login incorrect" is displayed.
2.13.3 Format of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS Event (remainder_of_body)

remainder_of_body of the NT_FILE_TRANSFER_STATUS event is always null.
2.14 Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event

2.14.1 Header Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event 2.14.2 Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event (filterable_data)
2.14.1 Header Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event

Table 2-27 Header format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_PRBSTES T_STATUS.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Type
Description
type_name
string
2-28
Event Header Type
Type
Description
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.14.2 Format of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-28 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS event Name notificationId TPName Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications::FileTransferSt atus_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the TP for which a 2 Mbit/s PRBS test is performed. Status of the 2 Mbit/s PRBS test. The value is FT_COMPLETED or FT_IN_PROGRESS. percentComplete short Progress of the test. The value ranges from 0 to 100.
TestStatus
2.15 Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event

2.15.1 Header Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event 2.15.2 Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event (filterable_data)
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
2-29
2.15.1 Header Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event

Table 2-29 Header format of the NT_HEARTBEAT event Event Header Type fixed_header Name Level-1 Name event_type Level-2 Name domain_name string Domain of a notification event. The value is fixed as tmf_mtnm. Type of a notification event. The value is fixed as NT_HEARTB EAT. Name of a notification event. The value is always null. Timeout period of a notification event. Type Description
type_name
string
event_name
string
variable_header
Timeout
string
2.15.2 Format of the NT_HEARTBEAT Event (filterable_data)

Table 2-30 Format of filterable_data in structure of the NT_HEARTBEAT event Name notificationId objectName objectType emsTime Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T notifications:: ObjectType_T globaldefs::Time_T Description Unique ID of the notification event. Name of the object that reports the event. Type of the object that reports the event. Time (UTC) when the EMS reports the event.
2-30
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3
About This Chapter
3.1 emsMgr 3.2 equipment 3.3 managedElement 3.4 subnetworkConnection 3.5 multiLayerSubnetwork 3.6 topologicalLink 3.7 terminationPoint 3.8 protection 3.9 HW_mstpInventory 3.10 HW_mstpProtection 3.11 HW_mstpService 3.12 trafficDescriptor 3.13 encapsulationLayerLink 3.14 flowDomain 3.15 HW_controlPlane 3.16 maintenanceOps 3.17 TopoManagementManager 3.18 HW_vpnManager 3.19 trafficConditioningProfile
Information Model
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-1
3 Information Model
3.1 emsMgr
3.1.1 EMS_T
3.1.1 EMS_T
Name name userLabel Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string Description Name of an EMS. Null by default. This field can be set through the setUserLabel interface. The value of this field is consistent with the name of the EMS in the name field mentioned above. The default value is Huawei/ U2000. This field can be set through the configuration file. Null by default. This field can be set through the setOwner interface. Version (in the form of VxxRxxxCxx) of the EMS, for example, U2000 V100R002C01. For the U2000, the default value is U2K. This field cannot be set.
nativeEMSName
string
owner
string
emsVersion
string
Type
string
3-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name addtionalIfo
Type globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Additional information, which currently includes the AlarmSeverity, Location, CommuAddress, EmsTime InterfaceVersion, and EmsState parameters. AlarmSeverity: indicates the highest severity level of active alarms in the network management system. This field has five values:
l
PS_CRITICAL: indicates a critical alarm. PS_MAJOR: indicates a major alarm. PS_MINOR: indicates a minor alarm. PS_WARNING: indicates a warning alarm. Null: indicates that no alarm is active.
Location: indicates the physical location of the network management system. The default value is local. The value of this field can be set through the configuration file. CommuAddress: indicates the IP address and port number of the host where the northbound interface communicating with the upper-level network management system resides. The value is in the format of host:port, for example, 10.70.71.82:12003 and localhost:12003. EmsTime: current time (UTC) of the network management system, for example, 20071102110027.0Z, which indicates UTC 2007-11-02 11:00:27.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-3
3 Information Model
Name
Type
Description InterfaceVersion: indicates the interface version. EmsState: indicates the current status of the U2000.
3.2 equipment
3.2.1 EQTCreateData_T 3.2.2 Equipment_T 3.2.3 EquipmentHolder_T
3.2.1 EQTCreateData_T
Name userLabel Type string Description User label of the board to be installed. The value is a character string in a free format. This field can be null. The value is in the format that complies with the requirement of the U2000 GUI for naming objects. Flag that specifies whether the user label must be unique. Currently, this field is not supported and can be set to false only. Owner of the board to be installed. The value is a character string in a free format. This field can be null. The value is in the format that complies with the requirement of the U2000 GUI for naming objects. Type of the board to be installed. The value is in the format of board name(board type), for example, LWX (109). Name of the holder.
forceUniqueness
boolean
owner
string
expectedEquipmentObjectType
EquipmentObjectType_T
equipmentHolderName
3-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name additionalInfo
Description Additional field, which is not used or processed currently.
3.2.2 Equipment_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name of a board. User label of the board. Name of the board displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Onwer of the board. The value is null by default and can be set through the setOwner interface. Whether the reporting of alarms of boards is enabled. This value is always set to true. Working state of the board. Type of the board configured on the network management system. Type of the board installed on the NE. Part number of the board, which is a part of the bar code of the board. Version number of the board. Serial number of the board, which is a part of the bar code of the board.
Owner
string
alarmReportingIndicator
boolean
serviceState expectedEquipmentObjectType installedEquipmentObjectType installedPartNumber
ServiceState_T EquipmentObjectType_T
EquipmentObjectType_T string
installedVersion installedSerialNumber
string string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-5
3 Information Model
Name additionalInfo
Description Additional information, which currently includes AlarmSeverity and Port_xx_SFP. AlarmSeverity: Highest severity level of the current alarms in the subrack. This field has the same meaning and values as this field in the ManagedElement_T structure mentioned later. Port_xx_SFP: SFP information about port xx on the board. Only the boards that support Small FormFactor Pluggable support this parameter, such as NS2,12NS2 and so on.
3.2.3 EquipmentHolder_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name of a holder. User label of the holder. Name of the Holder displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Name of a holder. By default, this value is null. In the case of a WDM subrack, the value can be set through the interface. In the case of other equipment, the value cannot be modified. Whether reporting alarms of the holder is enabled. The value is always true. Type of the holder. The value is rack, shelf, or slot.
owner
string
alarmReportingIndicator
boolean
holderType
EquipmentHolderType_T
3-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name expectedOrInstalledEquipment
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
Description If the holder is a slot where a board is installed, the value is the name of the board. Otherwise, the value is null. If the holder is a slot, the value is the list of the boards that can be installed in the slot.Otherwise, the value is null. State of the holder. For a WDM subrack, this field includes the ProductName, Version, AlarmSeverity, PhyInfo, ShelfType, PreConfig, and GateWay parameters
acceptableEquipmentTypeList
EquipmentObjectTypeList_ T
holderState additionalInfo
HolderState_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.3 managedElement
3.3.1 ManagedElement_T
3.3.1 ManagedElement_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string Description Name of an NE. User label of the NE. Name of the NE displayed on the GUI. Owner of the NE. The value is null by default and can be set through the setOwner interface. Equipment room where the NE resides. Software version of the NE. For the U2000, the value is the name of the NE type.
location version productName
string string string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-7
3 Information Model
Name communicationState
Type CommunicationState_T
Description State of communications between the NE and the network management system. State of data synchronization between the NE and the network management system. List of the connection rates supported by the NE. Additional information, which currently includes the Preconfig, AlarmSeverity, PhyInfo, GateWay, ShelfType, Vendor, MaxTransferRate, Subnetwork, and PSNName parameters.
emsInSyncState
boolean
supportedRates additionalInfo
transmissionParameters::La yerRateList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.4 subnetworkConnection
3.4.1 CrossConnect_T 3.4.2 TPData_T 3.4.3 SubnetworkConnection_T 3.4.4 SNCCreateData_T 3.4.5 SNCModifyData_T
3.4.1 CrossConnect_T
Name active direction ccType aEndNameList Type boolean globaldefs::ConnectionDirec tion_T SNCType_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T Description State (active or inactive) of a cross-connection. Direction of the crossconnection. Type of the crossconnection. List of the TPs at the source end of the cross-connection.
3-8
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name zEndNameList addtionalInfo
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description List of the TPs at the sink end of the cross-connection. Additional information.
3.4.2 TPData_T
Name name tpMappingMode transmissionParams Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T terminationPoint::Terminati onMode_T transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T Description Name of a TP. Mapping mode. Transmission parameters. The user can set the layer rate that the TP supports and the overhead bytes of the layer rate. The value is always null. The value is always null.
ingressTrafficDescriptorName engressTrafficDescriptorName
globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
3.4.3 SubnetworkConnection_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name of an SNC. User label of the SNC. Name of the SNC displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Null by default. Activation state of the SNC. Direction. Layer rate level of the SNC.
owner sncState direction rate
string SNCState_T globaldefs::ConnectionDirec tion_T transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T

Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-9
3 Information Model
Name staticProtectionLevel sncType
Type StaticProtectionLevel_T SNCType_T
Description Static protection level. Type of the SNC. Currently, the following types are supported: ST_SIMPLE (a source and a sink), ST_ADDDROP_A (two sources and a sink), and ST_ADD_DROP_Z (a source and two sinks). List of the TPs at the source end of the SNC. For the element model, see "TPData_T".
aEnd
TPDataList_T
zEnd
TPDataList_T
List of the TPs at the sink end of the SNC. For the element model, see "TPData_T".
reroutedAllowed
Reroute_T
Flag of rerouting. The value is RR_NA, RR_NO, or RR_YES. Flag of network routes. The value is NR_NA, NR_NO, or NR_YES.
neworkRouted
NetworkRouted_T
3-10
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name additionalInfo
Description Additional information, which varies with the trail type. For an SDH trail, the additional information includes the SNCID, Remark1, Remark2, Customer A<n>_Timeslot, and Z<n>_Timeslot parameters. For a WDM trail, the additional information includes the Customer parameter. For an ASON trail, the additional information includes the LSPType, RelatedLsp, and RevertiveMode parameters. For a link server trail, the Server Type field is contained.
3.4.4 SNCCreateData_T
Name userLabel forceUnique ness owner direction Type string boolean string globaldefs:: Connection Direction_T Description User label that is specified during the creation of an SNC. Whether the user label is unique. The value can be false only and cannot be true. Owner that is specified during the creation of an SNC. Direction of a created trail. The value is CD_UNI (indicates a unidirectional trail) or CD_BI (indicates a bidirectional trail). When an ASON trail is created, the value of this field cannot be CD_UNI. When a WDM trail is created, the value of this field cannot be CD_BI.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-11
3 Information Model
Name staticProtectionLevel
Type StaticProtect ionLevel_T
Description When a WDM trail is created, this field is invalid. When SDH trails are created in non-full-route mode, this field indicates the protection level that routes are first calculated for. This field works with the protectionEffort field. When the value of protectionEffort is EFFORT_WHATEVER, routes are calculated for trails in the following order: PREEMPTIBLE: preemptible trail -> unprotected trail -> protected trail -> fully protected trail. UNPROTECTED: unprotected trail -> protected trail -> fully protected trail. PARTIALLY_PROTECTED: partially protected trail -> fully protected trail -> unprotected trail. FULLY_PROTECTED or HIGHLY_PROTECTED: fully or highly protected trail -> protected trail -> unprotected trail. When an SDH trail is created in full-route mode, this field is invalid. When an ASON trail is created, this field means the level of the ASON trail. In this case, this field is consistent with staticProtectionLevel in SubnetworkConnection_T.
protectionEf fort
ProtectionEf fort_T
Flag of protection effort. The value is EFFORT_WHATEVER, EFFORT_SAME_OR_BETTER, EFFORT_SAME_OR_WORSE, or EFFORT_SAME. Flag of rerouting. The value is RR_NA, RR_NO, or RR_YES. Flag of network routes. The value is NR_NA, NR_NO, or NR_YES. This field indicates the type (SDH, WDM, or ASON) of a trail being created. The value NR_YES indicates that an ASON trail is created.
rerouteAllo wed neworkRout ed
Reroute_T NetworkRou ted_T
sncType
SNCType_T
Type of the SNC created. In non-full-route mode: When an SDH, WDM, or ASON trail is created, the value of this field can be ST_SIMPLE only. In full-mode mode: When an SDH trail is created, the value of this field is ST_SIMPLE, ST_ADD_DROP_A, or ST_ADD_DROP_Z. When a WDM or ASON trail is created, the value of this field can be ST_SIMPLE only.
3-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name layerRate
Type transmission Parameters:: LayerRate_T
Description Level of a trail. When an SDH trail is created, the value of this field is E1 (VC12), E3 (VC3), E4 (VC4), VC4 Server, 4C, 8C, 16C, or 64C. When a WDM trail is created, the value of this field is GE Client and ODUk. When an ASON trail is created, the value of this field is be VC4, 4C, 8C, 16C, or 64C. When an RTN trail is created, the value of this field is VC4.
ccInclusions
CrossConne ctList_T
SDH/RTN Non-fullroute mode Full-route mode This field is invalid. All the route information.
ASON This field is invalid. All the route information.
WDM This field is invalid. You need to specify only the dynamic crossconnection information.
Input restriction on crossconnections
When creating an SDH trail, you can input ST_SIMPLE, ST_ADD_DROP_A, ST_ADD_DROP_Z as the cross-connection type. When protection is available, the working cross-connection must be followed by the protection cross-connection.For a source TP under 1+1 protection, you need not deliver dual-feed services when a creating trail. When creating a WDM trail, you must use a cross-connection of the ST_SIMPLE type and specify the attribute (working or protection) of the cross-connection according to the additionalInfo field of the crossconnection. For the parameters to be input, see the description of the addtionalInfo field in the CrossConnect_T structure.
neTpInclusi ons
ResourceLis t_T
Full-route mode
This field is invalid.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-13
3 Information Model
Name
Type
Description Non-fullroute mode SDH/RTN trail You can specify the following items that the trail must pass through:
l
NEs and portsWhen creating a higher-order service, you can specify ports and VC4 timeslots in this field. TimeslotsWhen creating a lower-order service, you can specify VC4 timeslots and lower-order timeslots. SNCsWhen creating a lower-order service, you can specify a VC4 server trail and a link server trail in this field. TLsWhen creating a higher-order service, you can specify the TLs that the trail must pass through.
WDM trail
You can specify the ports and channels that the trail must pass through. You cannot specify any NE, SNC, or TL that the trail must pass through. You can specify the NEs, ports, and timeslots that the trail must pass through. You cannot specify any SNC or TL that the trail must pass through. Additionally, you can constrain a working route instead of a protection route.
ASON trail
3-14
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name neTpSncExc lusions
Type ResourceLis t_T
Description In full-route mode, this field is invalid. In non-full-route mode, the operation of this field varies with the trail type. When creating an SDH trail, you can specify the following items that the trail must not pass through:
l
NEs and portsWhen creating a higher-order service, you can specify ports and VC4 timeslots in this field. TimeslotsWhen creating a lower-order service, you can specify VC4 timeslots and lower-order timeslots. SNCsWhen creating a lower-order service, you can specify a VC4 Server trail in this field. TLsWhen creating a higher-order service, you can specify the TLs that the trail must not pass through.
When you create a WDM trail, this field is not supported. When creating an ASON trail, you can specify the NEs, ports, and timeslots that the trail must not pass through. You cannot specify any SNC or TL that the trail must pass through. Additionally, you can constrain a working route instead of a protection route. fullRoute boolean Flag of full route. True: indicates that trails are created in full-route mode. False: indicates that trails are created in non-full-route mode. aEnd globaldefs:: NamingAttri butesList_T globaldefs:: NamingAttri butesList_T globaldefs:: NVSList_T When creating trails, specify a list of the TPs at the source end of the trail. When creating trails, specify a list of the TPs at the sink end of the trail. When creating trails, you can specify additional information, including the A1_Timeslot, Z1_Timeslot, BundledSNC, and LSP_Type parameters.
zEnd
additionalCr eationInfo
3.4.5 SNCModifyData_T
Name userLabel owner Type string string Description New user label after the modification. New owner after the modification.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-15
3 Information Model
Name forceUniqueness
Type boolean
Description Specifies whether the user label must be unique. The value can be only false and cannot be true. Direction of the connection. This field is not used. Type of the modification. The value is rerouting, add_protection, or remove_protection. Flag of rerouting. When an ASON trail is rerouted, this field indicates rerouting of the ASON trail. In other cases, this field is not used.
direction
globaldefs ::ConnectionDirection_T
modifyType
string
rerouteAllowed
Reroute_T
networkRerouted sncType staticProtectionLevel retainOldSNC modifyServers_allowed protectionEffort layerRate
NetworkRouted_T SNCType_T StaticProtectionLevel_T boolean boolean ProtectionEffort_T transmissionParameters ::LayerRate_T
New flag of network route after the modification. This field is not used. Static protection level This field is not used. This field is not used. This field is not used. This field is not used.
neTpInclusions
ResourceList_T
In full-route mode, this field is not used. This field is valid only when the routing constraints of an ASON trail are modified in non-full-route mode. In this case, the NEs, ports, and timeslots that the trail must pass through can be set.
3-16
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name neTpSncExclusions
Type ResourceList_T
Description In full-route mode, this field is not used. This field is valid only when the routing constraints of an ASON trail are modified. In this case, the NEs, ports, and timeslots that the trail must not pass through can be set.
fullRoute
boolean
Flag of full route. This field specifies routing constraints when an ASON trail is set. An ASON trail can be set in full-route or nonfull-route mode.In other cases, this field is not used.
addedOrNewRoute
RouteList_T
Information about a new route. When the routes of an SDH trail are modified, this field indicates the information about the route added to the SDH trail. The supported cross-connection types are ST_SIMPLE, ST_ADD_DROP_A, and ST_ADD_DROP_Z. When setting routing constraints for an ASON trail in full-route mode, you can use a unidirectional crossconnection of only the ST_SIMPLE type. Additionally, you must specify the attribute (working or protection) of the crossconnection according to the additionalInfo field of the cross-connection. For the parameters to be input, see the description of the addtionalInfo field in the CrossConnect_T structure. In other cases, this field is not used.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-17
3 Information Model
Name removedRoute
Type RouteList_T
Description Information about a removed route. When the routes of an SDH trail are modified, this field indicates the information about the route removed from the SDH trail. The supported cross-connection types are ST_SIMPLE, ST_ADD_DROP_A, and ST_ADD_DROP_Z. In other cases, this field is not used.
aEnd
globaldefs ::NamingAttributesList_T
New list of the TPs at the source end of trails after the modification. New list of the TPs at the sink end of trails after the modification. Additional information about the modification.
zEnd
additionalCreationInfo
3.5 multiLayerSubnetwork
3.5.1 MultiLayerSubnetwork_T
3.5.1 MultiLayerSubnetwork_T
Name name userLabel Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string Description Name of a subnet. The value is SubnetWork_1 by default.This field cannot be set. The value is SubnetWork_1 by default.This field cannot be set. Null by default. This field cannot be set.
nativeEMSName
string
owner
string
3-18
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name subnetworkType
Type Topology_T
Description Type of the subnet. The value is always multiLayerSubnetwork::T OPO_MESH. List of the supported levels of rates Additional information, including the MultiLayerSubnetworkLocation parameter.
supportedRates addtionalIfo
transmissionParameters::La yerRateList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.6 topologicalLink
3.6.1 TopologicalLink_T
3.6.1 TopologicalLink_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner direction Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string globaldefs ::ConnectionDirection_T rate aEndTP zEndTP additionalInfo transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NVSList_T Layer rate. Source. Sink. Additional information. This field is null. Description Name. User label. Local name. Name of the owner of the object. Direction.
3.7 terminationPoint
Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 3-19
3 Information Model
3.7.1 TerminationPoint_T
3.7.1 TerminationPoint_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name of a TP. User label of the TP. Name of the TP displayed on the GUI of the network management system. This field cannot be set. Owner of the TP. The value is null by default. For a PTP or FTP, the value of this field can be set through the setOwner interface. Descriptor of the incoming traffic. The value is null. Descriptor of the outgoing traffic. The value is null. Type of the TP. The value can be TPT_PTP (indicates a PTP or FTP) or TPT_CTP (indicates a CTP). Connection state.For a PTP, the value is always NA. For an FTP or a CTP, the value is any of the following:
l
owner
string
ingressTrafficDescriptorName egressTrafficDescriptorName Type
globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T TPType_T
connectionState
TPConnectionState_T
TPCS_SOURCE_CONNECTED: indicates that the TP is connected as a source. TPCS_SINK_CONNECTED: indicates that the TP is connected as a sink. TPCS_BI_CONNECTED: indicates that the TP is connected in two directions. TPCS_NOT_CONNECTED: indicates that the TP is not connected.
tpMappingMode
TerminationMode_T
Mapping mode of the TP.
3-20
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name direction
Type Directionality_T
Description Direction of the TP. The value is CD_BI (indicates a bidirectional TP) or CD_UNI (indicates a unidirectional TP). Transmission parameters. This field is not supported and is always set to NA. Flag of edge point. For a CTP or an FTP, the value is always false.For a PTP, the value is false if the PTP is occupied by fibers; otherwise, the value is true. Additional information.
transmissionParams tpProtectionAssociation edgePoint
transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T TPProtectionAssociation_T boolean
additionalInfo
3.8 protection
3.8.1 ProtectionGroup_T 3.8.2 SwitchData_T 3.8.3 WDMProtectionGroup_T 3.8.4 WDMSwitchData_T 3.8.5 EProtectionGroup_T 3.8.6 ESwitchData_T 3.8.7 IPSwitchData_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-21
3 Information Model
3.8.1 ProtectionGroup_T
Name name Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Description Name of a protection name, in the form of {name EMS value XXXX}{name ManagedElement value YYYY}{name PGP value 1/ ID of the protection group/ location ID of the protection group} Location IDs of protection groups and the corresponding meanings are as follows: 11 indicates 1+1 TM protection group. 12 indicates west 1+1 ADM protection group. 13 indicates east 1+1 ADM protection group. 14 indicates 1:N TM protection group. 15 indicates west 1:N ADM protection group. 16 indicates east 1:N ADM protection group. 17 indicates two-fiber ring protection group. 18 indicates west two-fiber ring protection group. This is available for notification events only. 19 indicates east two-fiber ring protection group. This is available for notification events only. 20 indicates four-fiber ring protection group. 21 indicates west four-fiber 1:N protection group. 22 indicates east four-fiber 1:N protection group. userLabel string User label. This field can be set through the setUserLabel interface.
3-22
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name nativeEMSName
Type string
Description Local name. This field can be set through the setnativeEMSName interface. Name of the object holder. The types of the supported protection groups are as follows: For a 1+1 protection group, the value is PGT_MSP_1_PLUS_1. For a 1:N protection group, the value is PGT_MSP_1_FOR_N. For a two-fiber bidirectional protection group, the value is PGT_2_FIBER_BLSR. For a four-fiber bidirectional protection group, the value is PGT_4_FIBER_BLSR. For an SNCP protection group, the value is PT_SNCP.
owner protectionGroupType
string ProtectionGroupType_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-23
3 Information Model
Name protectionSchemeState
Type ProtectionSchemeState_T
Description 1. 1+1 1) When the PG is in the idle, normal, or unknown state, the value of this field is PSS_UNKNOWN. 2) In the case of the lockout, forced switching, or manual switching, the value of this field is PSS_FORCED_OR_LOC KED_OUT. 3) When the automatic switching of the protection group occurs, the value of this field is PSS_AUTOMATIC. 2. 1:N 1) When the channel is in the normal or unknown state, the value of this field is PSS_UNKNOWN. 2) In the case of the lockout, forced switching, or manual switching, the value of this field is PSS_FORCED_OR_LOC KED_OUT. 3) When the automatic switching of the protection group occurs, the value of this field is PSS_AUTOMATIC. 3. Two-fiber protection group 1) When the channel is in the normal, unknown, or idle (the standby channel is the worker) state, the value of this field is PSS_UNKNOWN. 2) In the case of the lockout, forced switching, or manual switching, the value of this field is PSS_FORCED_OR_LOC KED_OUT. 3) When the automatic switching of the protection
3-24
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name
Type
Description group occurs, the value of this field is PSS_AUTOMATIC. 4. Four-fiber protection group 1) When the channel is in the normal or unknown state, the value of this field is PSS_UNKNOWN. 2) In the case of the lockout, forced switching, or manual switching, the value of this field is PSS_FORCED_OR_LOC KED_OUT. 3) When the automatic switching of the protection group occurs, the value of this field is PSS_AUTOMATIC.
reversionMode
ReversionMode_T
Reversion mode. The value can be revertive, nonrevertive, or unknown. Transmission rate.
rate
transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-25
3 Information Model
Name pgpTPList
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T
Description Working TPs are followed by protection TPs. 1. For a 1+1 TM protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTP, west protection PTP. For a west 1+1 ADM protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTP, west protection PTP. 2. For a 1:N TM protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTPs numbered 1 through N, west protection PTP. For a west 1:N ADM protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTPs numbered 1 through N, west protection PTP. 3. For a two-fiber ring protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTP, east protection PTP. 4. For a four-fiber ring protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTP, west protection PTP, east working PTP, east protection PTP. For a west four-fiber ring 1:N protection group, the TPs are listed in the following order: west working PTP, west protection PTP.
3-26
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name pgpParameters
Description This field supports nine parameters. SwitchMode: switching mode.For a 1+1 protection group, the value is SingleEnded (indicates switching at a single end) or DualEnded (indicates switching at two ends). For other protection modes, the value is DualEnded. wtrTime: wait-to-restore time. HoldOffTime: Currently, this parameter is not supported and is always set to Unknown. LODNumSwitches: number of switches. Currently, this parameter is not supported and is always set to Unknown. LODDuration: works with LODNumSwitches. Currently, this parameter is not supported and is always set to Unknown. SPRINGProtocol: a ring switching protocol. This parameter is available for two-fiber rings and four-fiber rings only. The value is Standard. SPRINGNodeId: ID of a ring switching node. This parameter is available for two-fiber rings and four-fiber rings only. SwitchPosition: switching position. The value is IDLE, SWITCH, or PASS_THROUGH. This parameter is available only for the two-fiber ring and four-fiber ring protection groups, and the value is Unknown.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-27
3 Information Model
Name
Type
Description nonPre-EmptibleTraffic: determines whether nonpreemptible traffic can be configured on protection.This parameter is available for only two-fiber ring and 1:N protection groups. The value is NOT_ALLOWED.
additionalInfo
Null.
3.8.2 SwitchData_T
Name protectionType Type ProtectionType_T Description For a 1+1, 1:N, two-fiber, or four-fiber protection group, the value is PT_MSP_APS. For an SNCP protection group, the value is PT_SNCP. Switching cause. 1. In case of the idle state, the value is SR_RESTORED. 2. In the case of the lockout, forced switching, or manual switching state, the value is SR_MANUAL. 3. In the case of the wait-torestore or automatic switching state, the value is SR_AUTOMATIC_SWIT CH. 4. In the case of the SD switching state, the value is SR_SIGNAL_DEGRADE. 5. In the case of the SF switching state, the value is SR_SIGNAL_FAIL. 6. In other cases, the value is SR_NA. LayerRate transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T Layer rate of the protection group.
switchReason
SwitchReason_T
3-28
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name groupName protectedTP switchToTP additionalInfo
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Name of the protection group. Protected TP during the switching. Destination TP that is switched to. Null.
3.8.3 WDMProtectionGroup_T
Name name userLabel Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string Description Name of a protection group. Null by default. This field can be set through the setUserLabel interface. A non-OLP protection group is named in the format of NE name + ID of the protection group. An OLP protection group is named in the format of NE name + OLP + slot ID. This field cannot be set. owner string Null by default. This field can be set through the setOwner interface. For a 1:N protection group, the value is 1VN. For other protection groups, the value is 1P1. The value is PSS_UNKNOWN, PSS_FORCED_OR_LOC KED_OUT, or PSS_AUTOMATIC. Reversion mode. The value is revertive, non-revertive, or unknown.
nativeEMSName
string
protectionGroupType
WDMProtectionGroupType _T
protectionSchemeState
ProtectionSchemeState_T
reversionMode
ReversionMode_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-29
3 Information Model
Name pgpTPList
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T
Description List of TPs (PTPs or FTPs) in the protection group. The TPs are listed in the following order: 1. Working FPs are followed by protection TPs, for example, working TP 1, protection TP1, working TP2, protection TP2. 2. For a non-revertive 1+1 protection group, the roles of the protection TP and the working TP change during the switching.
pgpParameters
In revertive mode, the value is null. In non-revertive mode, this field supports the wtrTime parameter, which is the waitto-restore time of the protection group.
additionalInfo
Additional information. Currently, the value is null.
3.8.4 WDMSwitchData_T
Name protectionType Type WDMProtectio nGroupType_T SwitchReason_ T Description Type of a protection group. For a 1:N protection group, the value is 1VN. For other protection groups, the value is 1P1. Reason of switching. The value can be SR_RESTORED, SR_MANUAL, SR_AUTOMATIC_SWITCH, SR_SIGNAL_MISMATCH, SR_SIGNAL_DEGRADE, SR_SIGNAL_FAIL, or SR_NA. Name of the protection group.
switchReason
wPGPName
globaldefs::Na mingAttributes _T globaldefs::Na mingAttributes _T
protectedTP
Revertive Mode Active TP is the working path Active TP
Non-Revertive Mode Active TP
3-30
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name
Type
Description Standby TP is the working path Special notes on a 1:N protection group Active TP Standby TP
1) Lockout: The protected TP is always the first working path. 2) Clearance of switching: In the normal state, the protected TP is always the first working path. In other switching states, the protected TP is the working path where the switching occurs. Revertive Mode Non-Revertive Mode Active TP Standby TP
switchToTP
globaldefs::Na mingAttributes _T
Active TP is the working path Standby TP is the working path Special notes on a 1:N protection group
Active TP Standby TP
1) Lockout: The protected TP is always the first working path. 2) Clearance of switching: In the normal state, the switched-to TP is always the first working path. In other switching states, the switched-to TP is the protection path.
additionalInfo
globaldefs::NV SList_T
Additional information. Currently, this field is null.
3.8.5 EProtectionGroup_T
Name name userLabel Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string Description Name of an equipment protection group. This field is null by default and cannot be set through the setUserLabel interface.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-31
3 Information Model
Name nativeEMSName
Type string
Description In the format of NE nametype of the protection groupID of the protection group, for example, NE90-1_PLUS_1-1. This field is null by default and cannot be set through the setOwner interface. Type of the equipment protection group. The value is 1_PLUS_1, INBD_1_PLUS_1, 1_FOR_N, or BPS. The value is always PSS_UNKNOWN. Reversion mode. The values are as follows:
l
owner
string
eProtectionGroupType
EProtectionGroupType_T
protectionSchemeState reversionMode
ProtectionSchemeState_T ReversionMode_T
RM_REVERTIVE: indicates revertive mode. RM_NON_REVERTIVE : indicates non-revertive mode. RM_UNKNOWN: indicates that the reversion mode is unknown.
protectedList
globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T
Names of the protected equipment, that is, working equipment. Names of the protection equipment.
protectingList
3-32
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name ePgParameters
Description Parameters of the protection group, including the following: type: indicates the function type of the equipment protection group. The values of this parameter are as follows:
l
PGT_TPS: indicates 1:N protection or BPS protection. PGT_XC: indicates protection of crossconnections. PGT_STG: indicates clock protection. PGT_SCC: indicates protection of the SCC board. PGT_LESS_XC: indicates protection of secondary crossconnections as contrasted with protection of primary cross-connections, for example, protection of lower-order crossconnections of OptiX 10G V2. PG_XC_STG: protection of the SCC board and clock. In certain equipment, the clock and cross-connection functions cannot be switched separately. PG_ATM: indicates 1+1 protection of ATM boards. wtrTime: indicates waitto-restore time. This parameter is valid for a revertive protection group only.
additionalInfo
Additional information. Currently, this field is null.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-33
3 Information Model
3.8.6 ESwitchData_T
Name eProtectionGroupType Type EProtectionGroupType_T Description See the description of this field in the EProtectionGroup_T structure. Reason of switching. The value is SR_MANUAL, SR_E_FAILURE, or SR_NA. SR_MANUAL: indicates the manual or forced switching state. SR_E_FAILURE: indicates the automatic switching state. SR_NA: indicates other states. ePGPName protectedE globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Name of the equipment protection group. List of protected boards. For a non-revertive protection group, the protected board is the current working board. Working board after the switching. For a nonrevertive protection group, the value of this field is consistent with the value of protectedE. Additional information. Currently, this field is null.
eSwitchReason
ESwitchReason_T
switchToE
additionalInfo
3.8.7 IPSwitchData_T
Name protectionType Type string Description Type of a tunnel protection group.
3-34
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name switchReason
Type SwitchReason_T
Description Cause of the switching. The values include SR_RESTORED, SR_SIGNAL_FAIL, SR_SIGNAL_MISMATCH, SR_SIGNAL_DEGRADE, SR_AUTOMATIC_SWIT CH, SR_MANUAL, and SR_NA. This parameter value is consistent with the layer rate of the tunnel in a protection group. The values include LR_MPLS_PATH, LR_IP_PATH, and LR_GRE_PATH. Name of a protection group. List of tunnels under protection. List of current tunnels after the switching. Additional information. Currently, this field is null.
layerRate
transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T
groupName protectedList switchToList additionalInfo
globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.9 HW_mstpInventory
3.9.1 HW_MSTPEndPoint_T 3.9.2 HW_VirtualBridge_T 3.9.3 HW_VirtualLAN_T 3.9.4 HW_ForwardEndPoint_T 3.9.5 HW_MSTPBindingPath_T 3.9.6 HW_QosRule_T 3.9.7 HW_Flow_T 3.9.8 HW_LinkAggregationGroup_T 3.9.9 HW_LAGBranchPort _T 3.9.10 HW_SpanningTree_T 3.9.11 HW_STCurrentPort_T
3 Information Model
3.9.12 ShapingQueue
3.9.1 HW_MSTPEndPoint_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. Direction of the MSTP endpoint. The endpoint is always bidirectional. The supported types are as follows:
l l l
owner direction
string terminationPoint::Directiona lity_T HW_MSTPEndPointType_ T
type
HW_MEPT_NA HW_MEPT_ATM HW_MEPT_ATMTRUN K HW_MEPT_ETH HW_MEPT_ETHTRUN K HW_MEPT_LP HW_MEPT_RPR
l l
l l
transmissionParams additionalInfo
transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T additionalInfo
Transmission parameters that can be queried Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.9.2 HW_VirtualBridge_T
Name name userLabel Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string Description Name. User label.
3-36
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name nativeEMSName
Type string
Description Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. Logical ports of the virtual bridge. For the element model, see "HW_MSTPEndPoint_T".
owner logicalTPList
string HW_MSTPLogicalEndPoint List_T
additionalInfo
Additional information, containing LearnMode, FilterEnable, and MacLearnEnable.
3.9.3 HW_VirtualLAN_T
Name Name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. No attribute of the VLAN can be queried or set. List of forwarding ports of the VLAN. For the element model, see "HW_ForwardEndPoint_T". additionalInfo globaldefs::NVSList_T Additional information. This field is not processed.
owner paraList forwardTPList
string globaldefs::NVSList_T HW_ForwardEndPointList_ T
3.9.4 HW_ForwardEndPoint_T
Name logicTPName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
Description Name
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-37
3 Information Model
Name paraList
Description No attribute of the VLAN forwarding port can be queried or set. Additional information. This field is not processed.
additionalInfo
3.9.5 HW_MSTPBindingPath_T
Name direction Type terminationPoint::Directiona lity_T Description Direction of a binding path. The value is terminationPoint::D_SOU RCE, terminationPoint::D_SIN K, or terminationPoint::D_BIDIRECTIONAL. All the binding paths that can be used. The binding paths that are used. Additional information. This field is not processed.
allPathList usedPathList additionalInfo
globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.9.6 HW_QosRule_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner type Type globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T string string string HW_QosType_T Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. QoS type. The values are as follows: HW_QT_CAR HW_QT_COS
3-38
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name paraList
Type globaldefs::NVSList _T
Description In the case of CAR, supported parameters are as follows:

l l l l l l
EnableCar CIR DCBS PIR DMBS In the case of COS, supported parameters are as follows: The supported parameter set varies with the value of CoSType. Name of Parameter Supported SimplePri IPTOSD, IPTOST, IPTOSR, IPTOSC IPTOSn (n ranges from 0000 to 1111 in the binary mode.) DSCPn (n ranges from 000000 to 111111 in the binary mode.) TAGPRIn (n ranges from 0 to 7.)
Value of CosType SIMPLE IPTOS4 IPTOS16
DSCP
TAGPRI additionalInfo globaldefs::NVSList _T Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.9.7 HW_Flow_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system.
3-39
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name owner qosRuleNames paraList additionalInfo
Type string globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Owner. Names of QoS rules.

l
The supported parameters
Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.9.8 HW_LinkAggregationGroup_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. Supported paramters are as follows: Type indicates type of the link aggregation group. SharingType indicates the sharing state. mainPortName branchPortList globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T HW_LAGBranchPortList_T Name of the main port. Detailed information about the branch ports. For the element model, see "HW_LAGBranchPort _T". additionalInfo globaldefs::NVSList_T Additional information. This field is not processed.
Owner paraList
string globaldefs::NVSList_T
3-40
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.9.9 HW_LAGBranchPort _T
Name branchPortName branchPortParaList Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NVSList_T Description Name of a branch port. Supported parameters are as follows: States indicates the state of the tributary port. Priority indicates the priority of the tributary port.
3.9.10 HW_SpanningTree_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner STInfo STCurrentBridge STCurrentPort Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string globaldefs::NVSList_T globaldefs:: NVSList _T HW_STCurrentPortList_T Description Name. User label. Local name. Name of the owner of the object. Information of the spanning tree. Information of the spanning tree bridge. Information of the port of the spanning tree bridge. For the element model, see "HW_STCurrentPort_T".
3.9.11 HW_STCurrentPort_T
Name portName userLabel nativeEMSName
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string
Description Port name. User label. Local name.

3-41
3 Information Model
Name owner additionalInfo
Type string globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Name of the owner of the object. Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.9.12 ShapingQueue
Name queueID bEnable CIR CBS EIR EBS Type unsigned long boolean long long long long Description Queue ID. Whether ShapingQueue is enabled. Committed information rate. Committed burst size. Excess information rate. Excess burst size.
3.10 HW_mstpProtection
3.10.1 HW_RPRNode_T 3.10.2 HW_RPRTopoInfo_T 3.10.3 HW_RPRSwitchData_T 3.10.4 HW_AtmProtectGroup_T 3.10.5 HW_AtmServiceProtectPair_T 3.10.6 HW_AtmPGSwitchData_T 3.10.7 HW_AtmPGSingleEndSwitchPara_T
3.10.1 HW_RPRNode_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName
3-42
Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string
Description Name. User label. Local name.

Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name owner nodeNo protocolEnabled nodeParameters
Type string unsigned short boolean globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Name of the owner of the object. Number of a node on an RPR ring. Whether the RPR protocol is enabled on the node. Supported parameters are as follows: holdOffTime wtrTime protectMode restoreMode slowTime topoTimer
additionalInfo
3.10.2 HW_RPRTopoInfo_T
Name nodeName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Description Name of a node. See the HW_RPRNode_T structure.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-43
3 Information Model
Name topoParameters
Description Topology parameters contains the following:

l l l l l l l l l l l l l
direction 0RingJumpNo 1RingJumpNo ProtectMode eastNeighbordNodeNo westNeighbordNodeNo eastProtectState eastSwitchState westProtectState westSwitchState eastSendLinkWeight westSendLinkWeight eastA0ReservedBandWidth westA0ReservedBandWidth 0RingReachable 1RingReachable
l l
additionalInfo
3.10.3 HW_RPRSwitchData_T
Name nodeName switchReason switchState switchPosition Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T protection::SwitchReason_T HW_SwitchState_T HW_SwitchPosition_T Description Name of a node. Reason of switching. Switching state enumerated. Switching position.
3-44
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name switchParameters
Description The supported switching parameters are as follows:

l l l l l l
switchPosition switchState protectType SwitchCountTimes ProtectCountTime LastSwitchCommand
This field in the HW_RPRSwitchData_T structure contains east and west switching parameters. additionalInfo globaldefs::NVSList_T Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.10.4 HW_AtmProtectGroup_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. Protection type. Direction of switching. State of use. Detailed information about the source end. Detailed information about the sink end. List of the protection pair. For the element model, see "HW_AtmServiceProtectPai r_T".
owner protectType switchDirect useState srcEndPara snkEndPara ppList
string HW_AtmProtectType_T HW_AtmPGSwitchDirect_ T HW_AtmPGUseState_T HW_AtmPGSingEndPara_T HW_AtmPGSingEndPara_T HW_AtmServiceProtectPair List_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-45
3 Information Model
Name additionalInfo
Description Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.10.5 HW_AtmServiceProtectPair_T
Name workServiceName protectServiceName monitorFlag Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T HW_AtmMonitorFlag_T Description Name of working service. Name of protection service. Monitoring status flag. The value is HW_AMF_NA, HW_AMF_CONNECTION, HW_AMF_PROTECT_P AIR. additionalInfo globaldefs::NVSList_T Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.10.6 HW_AtmPGSwitchData_T
Name pgName protectType Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T HW_AtmProtectType_T Description Name. Protection type enumerated by the TMF. For details, see the IDL. Detailed information about the source end. Detailed information about the sink end. Additional information. This field is not processed.
srcEndSwitchPara snkEndSwitchPara additionalInfo
HW_AtmPGSingleEndSwit chPara_T HW_AtmPGSingleEndSwit chPara_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3-46
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.10.7 HW_AtmPGSingleEndSwitchPara_T
Name switchReason Type protection::SwitchReason_T Description Reason of switching enumerated by the TMF. For details, see the IDL. Switching state enumerated by the TMF. For details, see the IDL. Additional information. This field is not processed.
switchState
HW_SwitchState_T
additionalInfo
3.11 HW_mstpService
3.11.1 HW_EthServiceTP_T 3.11.2 HW_EthService_T 3.11.3 HW_EthServiceCreateData_T 3.11.4 HW_AtmService_T 3.11.5 HW_AtmServiceCreateData_T 3.11.6 HW_AtmServiceTP_T
3.11.1 HW_EthServiceTP_T
Name name vlanID tunnel vc additionalInfo Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T unsigned short unsigned long unsigned long globaldefs::NVSList_T Description Name. VLAN ID. Tunnel label. VC label. Additional information.
3.11.2 HW_EthService_T
Name name Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T
Description Name.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-47
3 Information Model
Name userLabel nativeEMSName
Type string string
Description User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. Type of a service:
l l l l
owner serviceType
string HW_EthServiceType_T
HW_EST_NA HW_EST_EPL HW_EST_EVPL HW_EST_EPLAN
HW_EST_EVPLAN direction globaldefs::ConnectionDirec tion_T Direction of the service:

l
CD_UNI: unidirectional
CD_BI: bidirectional activeState aEndPoint zEndPoint additionalInfo boolean HW_EthServiceTP_T HW_EthServiceTP_T globaldefs::NVSList_T State of the service. Information about the source end of the service. Information about the sink end of the service. Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.11.3 HW_EthServiceCreateData_T
Name serviceType Type HW_EthServiceType_T Description Type of a service, which is specified when the service is created. Direction of the service. TP at the source end of the service. TP at the sink end of the service. Additional information. This field is not processed.
direction aEndPoint zEndPoint additionalInfo
globaldefs::ConnectionDirec tion_T HW_EthServiceTP_T HW_EthServiceTP_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3-48
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.11.4 HW_AtmService_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string Description Name. User label. Name displayed on the GUI of the network management system. Owner. Protection type:
l l l
owner protectType
string HW_mstpProtection::HW_ AtmProtectType_T
HW_APT_NA HW_APT_NONE HW_APT_1PLUS1
HW_APT_1V1 serviceType HW_AtmServiceType_T Type of the service:

l l
HW_AST_NA HW_AST_PVP
HW_AST_PVC spreadType HW_AtmServiceSpreadTyp e_T Spread type:

l l l
HW_ASST_NA HW_ASST_P2P HW_ASST_P2MPROOT
HW_ASST_P2MPLEAF protectRole HW_AtmProtectRole_T Protection role:

l l
HW_APR_NA HW_APR_WORKING
HW_APR_PROTECTING activeState aEndPoint zEndPoint additionalInfo boolean HW_AtmServiceTP_T HW_AtmServiceTP_T globaldefs::NVSList_T Flag that specifies whether the service is active. TP at the source end of the service. TP at the sink end of the service. Additional information. This field is not processed.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-49
3 Information Model
3.11.5 HW_AtmServiceCreateData_T
Name protectType serviceType spreadType protectRole aEndPoint zEndPoint active additionalInfo Type HW_mstpProtection::HW_ AtmProtectType_T HW_AtmServiceType_T HW_AtmServiceSpreadTyp e_T HW_AtmProtectRole_T HW_AtmServiceTP_T HW_AtmServiceTP_T boolean globaldefs::NVSList_T Description Protection type. Type of the service. Spread type. Protection role. TP at the source end of the service. TP at the sink end of the service. Flag that specifies whether the service is active. Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.11.6 HW_AtmServiceTP_T
Name name Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T boolean globaldefs::NVSList_T Description Name of the TP at the source or sink end of the ATM service Name of the traffic descriptor. Whether to enable the traffic control. Additional information.
trafficDescriptorName bPC additionalInfo
3.12 trafficDescriptor
3.12.1 TrafficDescriptor_T 3.12.2 TDCreateData_T
3-50
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.12.1 TrafficDescriptor_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner serviceCategory trafficParameters Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string ServiceCategory_T TrafficParameterList_T Description Name User label. Local name. Name of the owner of the object. Category of the traffic descriptor. Parameters of the traffic descriptor, including the following: PCR-<0+1> PCR-<0> SCR-<0+1> SCR-<0> CDVT MBS TAG TRANSPARENT FDISCARD QOSLEVEL conformanceDefinition activeState additionalInfo string boolean globaldefs::NVSList_T The value is always UNI 4.1. Flag of activation. Additional information.
3.12.2 TDCreateData_T
Name userLabel forceUniqueness Type string boolean Description User label. Whether the user label is required to be unique. The value True is not supported. Name of the owner of the object.
3-51
Owner
string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name serviceCategory trafficParameters
Type ServiceCategory_T TrafficParameterList_T
Description Type of the traffic descriptor. Parameters of the traffic descriptor, including the following:
l l l l l l l l l l
PCR-<0+1> PCR-<0> SCR-<0+1> SCR-<0> CDVT MBS TAG TRANSPARENT FDISCARD QOSLEVEL
conformanceDefinition activeState additionalInfo
string boolean globaldefs::NVSList_T
The value is always UNI 4.1. Flag of activation. Additional information. This field is not processed.
3.13 encapsulationLayerLink
3.13.1 EncapsulationLayerLink_T 3.13.2 ELLinkCreateData_T
3.13.1 EncapsulationLayerLink_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner type Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string LinkType_T Description The name of the encapsulation layer link User label. Local name. Name of the owner of the object. The value is always LT_POINT_TO_POINT.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-52
3 Information Model
Name transmissionParams rate networkAccessDomain endTPs
Type transmissionParameters::La yeredParameters_T transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T string globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T boolean globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Transmission parameters. The value is always 96. The value is always null. The list of TPs for the source and sink of the encapsulation layer link. The name list of SNCs at the bottom server layer. Whether the state of the ELL is terminal. The value is always null The value is always null
route segment routeGroups additionalInfo
3.13.2 ELLinkCreateData_T
Name userLabel forceUniqueness Type string boolean Description User label. Whether the user label is unique. The value can be false only and cannot be true. Name of the owner of the object. The value is always null. Transmission parameters. The value is always 96. The value is always LT_POINT_TO_POINT. The list of TPs terminating the encapsulation layer link. Whether the state of the ELL is terminal.
3-53
owner networkAccessDomain transmissionParams rate type endTPs segment
string string transmissionParameters::La yeredParameters_T transmissionParameters::La yerRate_T LinkType_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T boolean
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name provisioningMode
Type BandwidthProvisioningMod e_T
Description The policy for creating server SNCs during the creation of an encapsulation layer link. The value is BP_NONE,BP_AUTOMA TIC,BP_MANUAL, or BP_BY_CALL.
sncList callName additionalCreationInfo
subnetworkConnection::SN CCreateDataList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
The name list of SNCs at the server layer. Name. Additional information, including ActivateStatus, Direction, ReuseSnc, and SncUniqueID.
3.14 flowDomain
3.14.1 FlowDomain_T 3.14.2 FlowDomainFragment_T 3.14.3 FDFrCreateData_T 3.14.4 EthernetOAMPoint_T 3.14.5 EthernetOAMOperation_T 3.14.6 EthernetOAMParamer_T 3.14.7 EthernetLTTestResult_T
3.14.1 FlowDomain_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string Description The name of the flow domain. The default value is Flowdomain_1. The default value is Flowdomain_1. The value is always null.
3-54
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name transmissionParams networkAccessDomain mfds fdEdgeCPTPs fdInternalCPTPs fDConnectivityState
Type transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T string globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T ConnectivityState_T
Description The value is always null. The value is always null. The value is always null. The value is always null. The value is always null. The value is always flowDomain::CS_UNKNOWN The value is always FDT_NETWORK. Additional information.
fdType additionalInfo
FDType_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.14.2 FlowDomainFragment_T
Name name userLabel nativeEMSName owner direction Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string string string globaldefs::ConnectionDirec tion_T Description The name of the flow domain fragment This field cannot be set. This field cannot be set. This field cannot be set. The directionality of the FDFr. The value is CD_UNI or CD_BI. transmissionParams transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T Transmission parameters, containing FlowdomainFragmentType and Terminal The value is always null. globaldefs::NamingAttribute sList_T string The list of TPs terminating the encapsulation layer link. The value is always null.
mfds endTPs networkAccessDomain
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-55
3 Information Model
Name flexible administrativeState
Type boolean performance::Administrativ eState_T subnetworkConnection::SN CState_T
Description The value is always false The value is always performance::AS_Unlocked. The state of the FDFr, containing SNCS_NONEXISTENT, SNCS_PENDING, SNCS_ACTIVE, and SNCS_PARTIAL. The types of the FDFr supported are as follows: FDFRT_POINT_TO_POI NT, FDFRT_POINT_TO_MU LTIPOINT, and FDFRT_MULTIPOINT.
fdfrState
fdfrType
FDFrType_T
additionalInfo
Additional information.
3.14.3 FDFrCreateData_T
Name name userLabel forceUniqueness Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string boolean Description The name of the flow domain fragment. User label. Whether the user label is unique. The value can be false only and cannot be true. Name of the owner of the object. The value is always null. The value is always performance::AS_Unlocked Transmission parameters.
owner networkAccessDomain administrativeState
string string performance::Administrativ eState_T transmissionParameters::La yeredParameters_T
transmissionParams
3-56
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name additionalCreationInfo
Description Additional information, containing ActivateStatus, Direction, and EPLan.
3.14.4 EthernetOAMPoint_T
Name name type Type string EthernetOAMPointType_T Description The name of the ethernet OAM point. The types of the ethernet OAM point supported are as follows:
l l
EOT_MEP EOP_MIP
direction
EthernetOAMPointDirectio n_T
The direction of the ethernet OAM point, containing EOPD_BI, EOPD_INGRESS, and EOPD_EGRESS. The level of ethernet OAM point. Additional information.
level additionalInfo
unsigned long globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.14.5 EthernetOAMOperation_T
Name command Type EthernetOAMCommandTyp e_T Description The types of the ethernet OAM command supported are as follows:
l l l
EOCT_CC EOCT_LB EOCT_LT
srcPoint snkPoint
EthernetOAMParamer_T EthernetOAMParamer_T
The source OAM point. The source OAM point.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-57
3 Information Model
Name additionalInfo
Description Additional information When the type of the ethernet OAM command is EOCT_CC, the additionalInfo contains srcCCActive and snkCCActive In other cases, this field is not used.
3.14.6 EthernetOAMParamer_T
Name oamPointName period Type string unsigned long Description The name of the OAM point. The period of ethernet OAM command.
3.14.7 EthernetLTTestResult_T
Name oamPointName hopNumber result Type string unsigned long boolean Description The name of the OAM point. The hop-number of the LinkTrace. The result of the Link-Trace.
3.15 HW_controlPlane
3.15.1 HW_SnppLink_T 3.15.2 HW_Capacity_T
3.15.1 HW_SnppLink_T
Name name Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Description The name of the SNPPLink.
3-58
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Name userLabel nativeEMSName owner aEndSnppName zEndSnppName direction
Type string string string globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Globaldefs ::ConnectionDirection_T
Description User label. Local Name Name of the owner of the object. The name of the source TP of the SNPPLink. The name of the sink TP of the SNPPLink. The direction of the SNPPLink. The list of the crossconnection rate supported by the SNPPLink. The weight of the SNPPLink. The protection types of the SNPPLink supported are as follows:
l l l l
rateList
transmissionParameters ::LayerRateList_T
cost protectType
unsigned short HW_LinkProtectType_T
PROTECTED PREEMPTIBLE UNPROTECTED PROTECTED/ PREEMPTIBLE PROTECTED/ PREEMPTIBLE/ UNPROTECTED
linkCapacity
HW_LinkCapacity_T
The bandwidth capacity of the SNPPLink. For the element model, see "HW_Capacity_T:.
linkState
HW_LinkState
The connection status of the SNPPLink,containing DISCONNECTED and CONNECTED.
srlgIDList
HW_SRLGIDList_T
The list of the shared risk link group ID. For the element model, see "HW_SRLGID_T(unsigned long)".
additionalInfo
Additional information
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-59
3 Information Model
3.15.2 HW_Capacity_T
Name unit Type transmissionParameters ::LayerRate_T Bandwidth additionalInfo unsigned long globaldefs::NVSList_T Description The list of the crossconnection rate supported. The bandwidth. Additional information.
3.16 maintenanceOps
3.16.1 CurrentMaintenanceOperation_T 3.16.2 PRBSTestResult_T 3.16.3 PRBSTestParameter_T 3.16.4 SampleResult_T 3.16.5 TestDuration_T
3.16.1 CurrentMaintenanceOperation_T
Name tpName maintenanceOperation Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T MaintenanceOperation_T Description The name of the TP. Current maintenance operation that has been invoked, containing the following: FACILITY_LOOPBACK TERMINAL_LOOPBACK FACILITY_FORCED_AI S TERMINAL_FORCED_A IS layerRate transmissionParameters ::LayerRate_T additionalInfo globaldefs::NVSList_T The layer rate to which the maintenance operation applies. Additional information.
3-60
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.16.2 PRBSTestResult_T
Name testPara startTime sampleResultList Type PRBSTestParameter_T globaldefs::Time_T SampleResultList_T Description The test arameters. The start time of the test. The result of the test. For the element model, see "SampleResult_T". totalBitError realDuration unsigned long TestDuration_T The total number of the bit errors. The duration of the actual test. For the element model, see "TestDuration_T".
3.16.3 PRBSTestParameter_T
Name tpName testDuration sampleGranularity testType Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T TestDuration_T SampleGranularity_T PRBSTestType_T Description The name of the TP. The duration of the test. Sampling period. The test types supported are as follows: FACILITY_PRBS_TEST TERMINAL_PRBS_TES T accumulatingIndicator boolean Accumulate bit error values or not.
3.16.4 SampleResult_T
Name sampleTime value Type globaldefs::Time_T unsigned long Description Sampling time. The number of the bit errors.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-61
3 Information Model
3.16.5 TestDuration_T
Name value unit Type unsigned long string Description The value of the test duration. The unit of the test duration.
3.17 TopoManagementManager
3.17.1 Node_T 3.17.2 Position_T
3.17.1 Node_T
Name name nativeEMSName nodeType Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T string NodeType_T Description The name of the topology node. Local name. The types of the node supported are as follows: NODETYPE_ME NODETYPE_TOPO_SN position parent additionalInfo Position_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NVSList_T The coordinate information. The name of the parent topology node. Additional information.
3.17.2 Position_T
Name xPos yPos Type long long Description X-axis Y-axis
3.18 HW_vpnManager
HW_vpnManager manages tunnels and services. The model for MPLS static tunnels and PW switch are IPCrossConnection. The model for dynamic MPLS tunnels and IP tunnels is
3 Information Model
TrafficTrunk. The model for PWE3 (that is, the ATM service, CES service, and E-Line service) and VPLS is MFDFr.
NOTE
PTN equipments are supported.
3.18.1 MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T 3.18.2 MultipointServiceAttr_T 3.18.3 StaticMacAddress_T 3.18.4 SplitHorizonGroup_T 3.18.5 IPCrossConnection_T 3.18.6 TrafficTrunk_T 3.18.7 RouteConstraint_T 3.18.8 MFDFrModifyData_T 3.18.9 TrafficTrunkCreateData_T 3.18.10 TrafficTrunkModifyData_T
3.18.1 MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T
Parameter name userLabel nativeEMSName owner direction Type globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T string string string globaldefs::ConnectionDirection _T Description Indicates the name. Indicates the alias of the object. By default, the value is null. Indicates the local name. Indicates the owner of the object. Indicates the direction. The value can be CD_UNI (unidirectional), or CD_BI) (bidirectional). Indicates the transmission parameters. For details, refer to the descriptions of the HW_vpnManager transmission parameter. Indicatea the multipoint service attributes. In the case of a PWE3 service, this parameter is null. For details, refer to the descriptions of MultipointServiceAttr_T.
transmissionParams
transmissionParameters::Layere dParameters_T
multipointServiceAttr
MultipointServiceAttr_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-63
3 Information Model
Parameter aEnd zEnd fdfrState
Type subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T subnetworkConnection::SNCSta te_T
Description Indicates the list of MFDFr source objects. Indicates the list of MFDFr sink objects. Indicates the activation status. The value can be SNCS_ACTIVE (active), SNCS_PENDING (inactive), SNCS_PARTIAL (partially active), or SNCS_NONEXISTENT (deleted). Indicates the administrative status. The value can be AS_Unlocked (locked), or AS_Locked (unlocked). Indicates whether a service access point can be added or deleted. The value can be true, which indicates that a service access point can be added or deleted, or false, which indicates that a service access point cannot be added or deleted Indicates the MFDFr type. The value can be FDFRT_MULTIPOINT, FDFRT_POINT_TO_MULTIPOINT, FDFRT_POINT_TO_POINT , or FDFRT_EXPLICIT. Indicates the additional information. Currently, it is null.
administrativeState
performance::AdministrativeStat e_T
flexible
boolean
mfdfrType
flowDomainFragment::FDFrTy pe_T
additionalInfo
3.18.2 MultipointServiceAttr_T
Parameter paraList staticMacList Type globaldefs::NVSList_T StaticMacAddressList_T Description Indicates the attribute list. Indicates the static MAC address list.
3-64
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Parameter shgList additionalInfo
Type SplitHorizonGroupAttrList_ T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Description Indicates the split horizon group list. Indicates the additional information.
The following table lists the specific attributes of paraList of a VPLS service. Parameter AccessMode Type string Description Indicates the access interface type. The value can be CAwared, S-Awared, or TAwared. Indicates whether to enable the function of self-learning MAC addresses. The value can be Enable, or Disable. Indicates the MAC address type. The value can be IVL, or SVL. Indicates whether to enable the aging ability. The value can be Enable, or Disable. Indicates the aging time. Indicates the capacity of the MAC address list. Indicates the upper threshold for MAC address monitoring. Indicates the lower threshold for MAC address monitoring. Indicates the method of processing unknown unicast frames. The value can be Discard, or Broadcast. Indicates the method of processing unknown multicast frames. The value can be Discard, or Broadcast.
MacLearning
string
MacLearnStyle
string
AgingAbility
string
AgingTime MaxMacNumber MaxMacMonitor
string string string
MinMacMonitor
string
UnknowUnicastServiceFrameDelivery
string
UnknowMulticastServiceFrameDelivery
string
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-65
3 Information Model
3.18.3 StaticMacAddress_T
Parameter staticMacType Type string Description Indicates the type of the static MAC address. The value can be StaticMac. Indicates the MAC address. Indicates the outer VLAN ID. Indicates the inner VLAN ID. Indicates a bound physical or logical port, PW, or QinQ link. Indicates the additional information.
macAddress peVID ceVID tpName additionalInfo
string unsigned long unsigned long globaldefs::NamingAttributes_ T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.18.4 SplitHorizonGroup_T
Parameter shgID shgMemberNameList Type unsigned long globaldefs::NamingAttributes List_T Description Indicates the ID of a split horizon group. Indicates the list of the members of a split horizon group. The member can be a port, PW, or QinQ link. Indicates the additional information.
additionalInfo
3.18.5 IPCrossConnection_T
Parameter name nativeEMSName userLabel owner Type globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T string string string Description Indicates the name. Indicates the local name. Indicates the alias of the object. By default, the value is null. Indicates the owner of the object.
3-66
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Parameter activeState
Type subnetworkConnection::SNCSta te_T
Description Indicates the activation status. The value can be SNCS_NONEXISTENT, SNCS_PENDING, SNCS_ACTIVE, or SNCS_PARTIAL. Indicates the administrative status. The value can be AS_Locked, or AS_Unlocked. Indicates the direction. The value can be CD_UNI (unidirectional), or CD_BI (bidirectional). Indicates the cross-connection type. The value can be ST_SIMPLE (one source and one sink), ST_ADD_DROP_A (two sources and one sink), ST_ADD_DROP_Z (one source and two sinks). Currently, only ST_SIMPLE is supported. Indicates the transmission parameters. For details, refer to the descriptions of the HW_vpnManager transmission parameter. Indicates the source list. Indicates the sink list. Indicates the additional information.
administrativeState
performance::AdministrativeStat e_T globaldefs::ConnectionDirection _T
direction
ccType
subnetworkConnection::SNCTy pe_T
transmissionParams
aEnd zEnd additionalInfo
subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
3.18.6 TrafficTrunk_T
Parameter name userLabel Type globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T string Description Indicates the name. Indicates the alias of the object. By default, the value is null.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-67
3 Information Model
Parameter nativeEMSName owner activeState
Type string string subnetworkConnection::SNCSta te_T
Description Indicates the local name. Indicates the owner of the object. Indicates the activation status. The value can be SNCS_NONEXISTENT, SNCS_PENDING, SNCS_ACTIVE, or SNCS_PARTIAL. Indicates the direction. The value can be CD_UNI, or CD_BI. Indicates the transmission parameters. For details, see Transmission Parameters of the Traffic Trunk. Indicates the source. Indicates the sink. Indicates the administrative status. The value can be AS_Locked, or AS_Unlocked. Indicates whether to enable the rerouting. The value can be RR_NA, RR_YES, or RR_NO. Indicates the network route. The value can be NR_NA, NR_YES, or NR_NO. Indicates the additional information.
direction
globaldefs::ConnectionDirection _T transmissionParameters::Layere dParameters_T
transmissionParams
aEnd zEnd administrativeState
subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T performance::AdministrativeStat e_T subnetworkConnection::Reroute _T
rerouteAllowed
networkRouted
subnetworkConnection::Networ kRouted_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
additionalInfo
3.18.7 RouteConstraint_T
Parameter ipAddress Type string Description Indicates the IP address.
3-68
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Parameter routingStytle
Type string
Description Indicates the route constraint type. The value can be excluded, includeLoose, or includeStrict. Indicates the additional information.
additionalInfo
3.18.8 MFDFrModifyData_T
Parameter modifyType Type string Description Indicates the modification type. The value can be add_endpoint, remove_endpoint, active_endpoint, deactive_endpoint, or modify_attr. Indicates the modified user label. Indicates whether a user label is required to be unique. The value can only be false. Indicates the modified owner. Indicates the modified multipoint service attributes. Indicates the modified transmission parameter attributes. For details, refer to the section that describes HW_vpnManager transmission parameters in this document. Indicates the list of source TPs to be modified. Indicates the list of sink TPs to be modified. Indicates the additional information about modifications. It is unused.
userLabel forceUniqueness
string boolean
owner multipointServiceAttr transmissionParams
string MultipointServiceAttr_T transmissionParameters::Layere dParameters_T
aEnd zEnd additionalInfo
subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T subnetworkConnection::TPData List_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-69
3 Information Model
3.18.9 TrafficTrunkCreateData_T
Parameter userLabel forceUniqueness Type string boolean Description Indicates the modified user label. Indicates whether a user label is required to be unique. The value can only be false. Indicates the modified owner. Indicates the connection direction. The value can be CD_UNI, CD_BI, or unused. Currently, only CD_UNI is supported. Indicates the rerouting. The value can be RR_NA, RR_YES, or RR_NO. Indicates the network route. The value can be NR_NA, NR_YES, or NR_NO. Indicates the transmission parameter attributes. For details, refer to the section that describes HW_vpnManager transmission parameters in this document.
owner direction
string globaldefs ::ConnectionDirection_T
rerouteAllowed
Reroute_T
networkRerouted
NetworkRouted_T
transmissionParams
fullRoute neTpInclusions neTpSncExclusions aEnd
boolean subnetworkConnection::Resourc eList_T subnetworkConnection::Resourc eList_T globaldefs ::NamingAttributesList_T
Indicates the full routing. Indicates the explicit port. Indicates the excluded port. Indicates the source TP list.
zEnd
Indicates the sink TP list.
ipCCInclusions
IPCrossConnectionList_T
Indicates the list of IP crossconnections involved. It is unused.
3-70
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
Parameter additionalCreationInfo
Description Indicates the additional information about creation. It is unused.
3.18.10 TrafficTrunkModifyData_T
Parameter userLabel forceUniqueness Type string boolean Description Indicates the modified user label. Indicates whether a user label is required to be unique. The value can only be false. Indicates the modified owner. It is unused. Indicates the connection direction. The value can be CD_UNI, CD_BI, or unused. Currently, only CD_UNI is supported. Indicates the rerouting. The value can be RR_NA, RR_YES, RR_NO, or unused. Indicates the network route. The value can be NR_NA, NR_YES, NR_NO, or unused. Indicates the transmission parameter attributes. For details, refer to the section that describes HW_vpnManager transmission parameters in this document.
owner direction
string globaldefs ::ConnectionDirection_T
rerouteAllowed
Reroute_T
networkRerouted
NetworkRouted_T
transmissionParams
addedOrNewRoute removedRoute neTpInclusions
IPCrossConnectionList_T IPCrossConnectionList_T subnetworkConnection::Resourc eList_T
Indicates the new IPCrossConnection list. Indicates the deleted IPCrossConnection list. Indicates the explicit port.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-71
3 Information Model
Parameter fullRoute neTpSncExclusions aEnd
Type boolean subnetworkConnection::Resourc eList_T globaldefs ::NamingAttributesList_T
Description Indicates the full routing. Indicates the excluded port. Indicates the source TP list. It is unused. Indicates the sink TP list. It is unused. Indicates the additional information. It is unused.
zEnd
additionalInfo
3.19 trafficConditioningProfile
3.19.1 HW_TCProfile_T 3.19.2 HW_TCProfileCreateData_T 3.19.3 TrafficConditioningProfileAssign_T 3.19.4 TrafficConditioningProfileDeassign_T
3-72
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.19.1 HW_TCProfile_T
Name name Type globaldefs::NamingAttribut es_T Description {name EMS value Huawei/ U2000}{name TCPROFILE value /type=Port/ devtype=PTN3900/ name=portprofile1900} {name EMS value Huawei/ U2000} {name TCPROFILE value /type=ATM/ devtype=COMMON/ name=AtmProfile} Value of the TCPROFILE tag. type indicates the policy type. devtype indicates the type ID of the equipment that is used to distinguish equipment types and is set to COMMON if equipment types are not distinguished. name indicates the policy name. Policy types and equipment types (in the brackets) are as follows: 1. Port (PTN3900, PTN1900, PTN3900_8, PTN910, PTN912, and PTN950) 2. VUNIIngress (PTN3900, PTN1900, PTN3900_8, PTN910, PTN912, PTN950, OSN1500, OSN3500, Metro1000V3, RTN910, and RTN950) 3. VUNIEgress 4. PW 5. ATM 6. ATMCoSMapping 7. DSDomain 8. QinQ 9. ServiceWred 10.PortWred 11.CAR 12.SVlanDEIUsedFlag 13.CoSQueueMapping 14.Wfq Currently, it is only required to fill the equipment type for the Port and VUNIIngress policies.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-73
3 Information Model
Name
Type
Description The Port, VUNIIngress, VUNIEgress, PW, ATM, ATMCosMapping, and DS fields are supported.
userLabel nativeEMSName owner classifierList transmissionParams additionalInfo
string string string HW_TrafficClassifierList_ T transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
User label. Name of a traffic policy. Name of an object owner. List of traffic classifications and action attributes. Transmission parameter. Extended parameter.
3.19.2 HW_TCProfileCreateData_T
Name userLabel forceUniqueness type Type string boolean string Description Name of a policy profile. The value is always set to True. Reference type.
l
Type that differentiates equipment: profiletype/ devtype Type that does not differentiate equipment: profiletype
owner classifierList transmissionParams additionalInfo
string HW_TrafficClassifierList_T transmissionParameters::La yeredParameterList_T globaldefs::NVSList_T
Object owner. List of classifications and behavior attributes. Transmission parameter. Extended parameter. Currently, it is null.
3-74
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3 Information Model
3.19.3 TrafficConditioningProfileAssign_T
Name tcpRef resourceName direction layerRate additionalInfo Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Directionality_T LayerRate_T globaldefs::NVSList_T Description Policy profile name. Applied object. Application direction. Layer rate. Extended parameter.
3.19.4 TrafficConditioningProfileDeassign_T
Name tcpRef resourceName direction layerRate additionalInfo Type globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T globaldefs::NamingAttribute s_T Directionality_T LayerRate_T globaldefs::NVSList_T Description Policy profile name. Applied object. Application direction. Layer rate. Extended parameter.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
3-75
4 Interface Model
4
About This Chapter
4.1 Common_I 4.2 EquipmentInventoryMgr_I 4.3 ManagedElementMgr_I 4.4 MultiLayerSubnetworkMgr_I 4.5 ProtectionMgr_I 4.6 HW_MSTPInventoryMgr_I 4.7 HW_MSTPProtectionMgr_I 4.8 HW_MSTPServiceMgr_I 4.9 TrafficDescriptorMgr_I 4.10 HW_controlPlaneMgr_I 4.11 EncapsulationLayerLinkMgr_I 4.12 FlowDomainMgr_I 4.13 MaintenanceMgr_I 4.14 TCProfileMgr_I 4.15 Session_I 4.16 HW_securityMgr_I 4.17 HW_VPNMgr_I
Interface Model
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-1
4 Interface Model
4.1 Common_I
4.1.1 setUserLabel 4.1.2 setnativeEMSName 4.1.3 setOwner 4.1.4 Notification
4.1.1 setUserLabel
Definition
void setUserLabel( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T objectName, in string userLabel, in boolean enforceUniqueness) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the user label for the specified object.
Parameters
Parameter objectName Input/Output Input Description The identifier of the object that you want to set the user label for. The user label that you want to set. Whether the user label is required to be unique. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
userLabel enforceUniqueness
Input Input
string boolean
4-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input object does not exist. The input is invalid. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
1. 2. On the U2000, the compulsory uniqueness of the UseLabel name of the object is not supported. Currently, you can set the UserLabel attributes for the following objects: EMS, Equipment, PTP, SNC, TopologicalLink, PGP, ME, MultiLayerSubnetwork, OCH CTP, PTN equipment protection group, Tunnel, Tunnel APS protection group. The input UserLabel character string should be less than 254 characters. The format of the input character string complies with the naming rules of objects on the U2000 client.
3.
4.1.2 setnativeEMSName
Definition
void setNativeEMSName( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T objectName, in string nativeEMSName) raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the nativeEMSName of object.
Parameters
Parameter objectName Input/Output Input Description The identifier of the object that you want to set nativeEMSName for. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-3
4 Interface Model
Parameter nativeEMSName
Input/Output Input
Description The nativeEMSName identifier that you want to set.
Value string
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input is invalid The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
1. 2. Currently, you can set the nativeEMSName attributes for the following objects: ME, SNC, TopologicalLink, physical subnet, and OCh CTP. The input nativeEMSName character string should be less than 254 characters. The format of the input character string complies with the naming rules of objects on the U2000 client.
4.1.3 setOwner
Definition
void setOwner (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T objectName, in string owner) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the Owner label of the specified object.
Parameters
Parameter objectName owner Input/Output Input Input Description Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T string
4-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input is invalid. The input object does not exsit. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
1. 2. Currently, you can set the Owner attributes for the following objects: EMS, Equipment, PTP, SNC, TopologicalLink, PGP, ME, and MultiLayer Subnetwork. The input Owner character string should be less than 254 characters. The format of the input character string complies with the naming rules of objects on the U2000 client.
4.1.4 Notification
The following notification is supported. Notification Name NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE Description Notification on the change of attributes Supported Objects The nativeEMSName, userLabel or owner attributes of EMS, PTP, Equipment, SNC, TopologicalLink, PGP, ME, and MultiLayerSubnetwork Remarks -
4.2 EquipmentInventoryMgr_I
4.2.1 provisionEquipment 4.2.2 unprovisionEquipment 4.2.3 Notifications
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-5
4 Interface Model
4.2.1 provisionEquipment
Definition
void provisionEquipment (in EQTCreateData_T equipmentCreateData, out Equipment_T createdEquipment) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Install a board.If the slot does not support the type of the board that you want to install, an abnormity notification of the port is sent.
Parameters
Parameter equipmentCreateData createdEquipment Input/Output Input Description The information about the board to be installed. The information about the board installed. Value EQTCreateData_T
Output
Equipment_T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND Description An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing. Invalid input. The input object does not exist.
Restriction
The setting of a unique userLabel is not supported. That is, in equipmentCreateData, forceUniqueness cannot be set to true.
4-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
4.2.2 unprovisionEquipment
Definition
void unprovisionEquipment (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T equipmentName) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete a board.
Parameters
Parameter equipmentName Input/Output Input Description The name of the board that you want to delete. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND Description EMS internal error. Invalid input. The input object does not exist.
Restrictions
None.
4.2.3 Notifications
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION Description Notification on creating an object. Supported Objects Equipment, EquipmentHolder (shelf) Remarks -
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-7
4 Interface Model
Notification Name NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION
Description Notification on deleting an object.
Supported Objects Equipment, EquipmentHolder (shelf)
Remarks -
4.3 ManagedElementMgr_I
4.3.1 setTPData 4.3.2 createCrossConnections 4.3.3 This interface is in the best-effort mode.deleteCrossConnections 4.3.4 activateCrossConnections 4.3.5 deactivateCrossConnections 4.3.6 createFTP 4.3.7 deleteFTP 4.3.8 modifyFTPMembers 4.3.9 Notifications
4.3.1 setTPData
Definition
void setTPData (in subnetworkConnection::TPData_T tpInfo, out terminationPoint::TerminationPoint_T modifiedTP) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set attributes for the specified TP.
Parameters
Parameter tpInfo Input/Output Input Description The information about the TP object that you want to set Value subnetworkConnecti on::TPData_T
4-8
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter modifiedTP
Input/Output Output
Description Modified TP information
Value terminationPoint::Te rminationPoint_T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input is invalid. The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
The attributes that can be set are as follows: AlarmReporting, SignalLabelActualTx, SignalLabelExpectedRx, TrailTraceActualTx, TrailTraceExpectedRx, Frequency, TCMTrailTraceMonitor, TCMContraTrailTraceMonitor, TCMTrailTraceActualTx, TCMContraTrailTraceExpectedRx, LaserStatus, AutoNegotiation, LaserAutoShut, ClientType, and ClientRate. In the case of WDM, when you set the type of the service that is transmitted, the following requirements should be met. The required input layer rate is 50 and the layer parameter is ClientType that is in the format as follows: {layer 50 transmissionParams { {name ClientType value "SDH/SONET/OTN/DVB/ FC /GBE/FE/HDTV/HDDI/HYBRID"} } In the case of WDM, when you set the rate of the client-side service that is transmitted, the following requirements should be met. Currently, you can set the client-side service rate for certain OTU boards. The required input layer rate is 50 and the layer parameter is ClientRate that is in the following format: {layer 50 transmissionParams { {name ClientRate value "client-side rate"} }
4.3.2 createCrossConnections
Definition
void createCrossConnections (in subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T ccList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T successedCCList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T failedCCList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-9
4 Interface Model
Function
Create a cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ccList Input/Output Input Description List of crossconnections to be created Value subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". successedCCList Output List of crossconnections that are successfully created subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". failedCCList Output List of crossconnections that fail to be created subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T".
Abnormal Value
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
The creation of SDH and WDM cross-connections are supported. The type of the cross-connection to be created can be SIMPLE, ADD_DROP_A, or ADD_DROP_Z (unidirectional). During the creation of SDH cross-connections, the value of active in cclist is not considered. The created cross-connection is inactive and the user needs to activate the cross-connection through the activateCrossConnections interface. During the creation of WDM cross-connections, if the value of the active in the cclist is True, the created cross-connetion is active. If the value of the active is False, the created crossconnection is inactive.
4 Interface Model
During the creation of WDM cross-connections, the value of direction in cclist is not considered. The created cross-connection is unidirectional. This interface is in the best-effort mode.
4.3.3 This interface is in the best-effort mode.deleteCrossConnections

Definition
void deleteCrossConnections (in subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T ccList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T successedCCList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T failedCCList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete a cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ccList Input/Output Input Description List of crossconnections to be deleted Value subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". successedCCList Output List of crossconnections that are successfully deleted subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". failedCCList Output List of crossconnections that fail to be deleted subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T".
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-11
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value
Restrictions
The deletion of SDH and WDM cross-connections is supported. The SIMPLE, ADD_DROP_A, and ADD_DROP_Z (unidirectional) cross-connections are supported. This interface is in the best-effort mode.
4.3.4 activateCrossConnections
Definition
void activateCrossConnections (in subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T ccList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T successedCCList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T failedCCList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activate a cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ccList Input/Output Input Description List of crossconnections to be activated Value subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T".
4-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter successedCCList
Input/Output Output
Description List of crossconnections that are successfully activated
Value subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T".
failedCCList
Output
List of crossconnections that fail to be activated
Abnormal Value
Restrictions
The activation of SDH and WDM cross-connections is supported. The SIMPLE, ADD_DROP_A, and ADD_DROP_Z (unidirectional) cross-connections are supported. This interface is in the best-effort mode.
4.3.5 deactivateCrossConnections
Definition
void deactivateCrossConnections (in subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T ccList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T successedCCList, out subnetworkConnection::CrossConnectLi st_T failedCCList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate a cross-connection.
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter ccList Input/Output Input Description List of crossconnections to be deactivated Value subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". successedCCList Output List of crossconnections that are successfully deactivated subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T". subnetworkConnecti on::CrossConnectLi st_T For the element model, see "CrossConnect_T".
failedCCList
Output
List of crossconnections that fail to be deactivated
Abnormal Value
Restrictions
The deactivation of SDH and WDM cross-connections is supported. The SIMPLE, ADD_DROP_A, and ADD_DROP_Z (unidirectional) cross-connections are supported. This interface is in the best-effort mode.
4-14
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
4.3.6 createFTP
Definition
void createFTP(in flowDomain::FTPCreateData_T createData, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out terminationPoint::TerminationPoint_T theFTP)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create an FTP.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Created data of the FTP Value flowDomain::FTPCr eateData_T For the element model, see "FTPCreateData_T". tpsToModify Input/Output TP data to be updated (this parameter is not supported and the validity of the value of this parameter is not verified) Data of the FTP that is successfully created subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T". terminationPoint::Te rminationPoint_T For the element model, see "TerminationPoint_ T".
theFTP
Output
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Description Invalid input. The input object does not exist.

4-15
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR
Description An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
The ports of the following types support the creation of an FTP:
l l l l l
LAG MP group Logical serial port IMA VE
4.3.7 deleteFTP
Definition
void deleteFTP(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ftpName)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete an FTP.
Parameters
Parameter ftpName Input/Output Input Description Name of the FTP to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description Invalid input. The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
4-16
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Restriction
The ports of the following types support the deletion of an FTP:
l l l l l
4.3.8 modifyFTPMembers
Definition
void modifyFTPMembers(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ftpName, in string modifyType,in subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpList,out subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T successedTPList,out subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T failedTPList)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Modify FTP member ports.
Parameters
Parameter ftpName modifyType Input/Output Input Input Description Name of the FTP to be modified Modification type (add, modify, and delete) Data of the FTP to be modified Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T string
tpList
Input
subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T".
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-17
4 Interface Model
Parameter successedTPList
Input/Output Output
Description Data of the FTP that is successfully modified
Value subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T". subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T".
failedTPList
Output
Data of the FTP that fails to be modified
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description Invalid input. The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
The ports of the following types support the modification of FTP member ports:
l l l l l
The modification functions are as follows:

l l l
Adding member ports Deleting member ports Modifying the attributes of member ports
This interface is in the best-effort mode.
4.3.9 Notifications
The following notifications are supported.
4-18
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION
Description Notification on creating an object
Supported Objects Managed Element, PTP, CROSSCONNECTI ON Managed Element, CROSSCONNECTI ON Managed Element, PTP
Remarks -
NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE
Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes
The notification on partial attribute change for managed elements and PTPs (attribute change of edge points) is supported. Notification on the state change (including communication state and data synchronization state) of managed elements is supported. Notification on the (activation and deactivation) state change of crossconnections is supported when then function is enabled.
NT_STATE_CHAN GE
Notification on the change of the object state
Managed Element, CROSSCONNECTI ON
4.4 MultiLayerSubnetworkMgr_I
4.4.1 createSNC 4.4.2 modifySNC 4.4.3 activateSNC 4.4.4 createAndActivateSNC 4.4.5 deactivateSNC 4.4.6 deleteSNC 4.4.7 deactivateAndDeleteSNC 4.4.8 checkValidSNC
4 Interface Model
4.4.9 setConjunctionSNC 4.4.10 swapSNC 4.4.11 Notifications
4.4.1 createSNC
Definition
void createSNC (in subnetworkConnection::SNCCreateData _T createData, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel, out subnetworkConnection::SubnetworkCon nection_T theSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create a subnet connection (SNC).
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Data for creating the SNC The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. Information of the SNC that is successfully created Value subnetworkConnecti on::SNCCreateData _T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
tolerableImpact
Input
emsFreedomLevel
Input
multiLayerSubnetW ork::EMSFreedomL evel_T
theSNC
Output
subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nection_T
4-20
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter errorReason
Input/Output Output
Description The cause of the creation failure
Value string
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input is invalid. The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
In the case of ASON trails, the creation of bidirectional LSP is supported. In createData, specifying the uniqueness of userLabel is not supported. The tolerableImpact and emsFreedomLevel parameters are not supported. In the case of ASON and WDM trails, the creation of the ST_SIMPLE type is supported. In the case of WDM trails, the creation of unidirectional GE client trail is supported. In non-full route situation, in the case of the SDH, the creation of the ST_SIMPLE type is supported. The following table defines error codes. Error Code 1092091958 1092091968 1092092142 1092092004 Scenario The scenario that the forceUniqueness parameter is set to true is not supported. During the trail creation, protectionEffort can be EFFORT_WHATEVER only. In non-full route situation, when an SNC is created, sncType can be ST_SIMPLE only. When a service is created, the delivered parameters sncType and aEnd/zEnd do not match. The service of the specified layerRate cannot be created. Incorrect ccInclusion is input.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-21
1092092024 1092092184
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Error Code 1092092185 1092092186 1092092187 1092092188 1092092189 1092092190
Scenario Incorrect neTPInclusion is input. Incorrect neTPSNCExclusions is input. Incorrect AEND is input. The AEND cross-connection rate level is incorrect. Incorrect ZEND is input. The ZEND cross-connection rate level of is incorrect.
4.4.2 modifySNC
Definition
void modifySNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName, in string routeId, in subnetworkConnection::SNCModifyData _T SNCModifyData, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, in subnetworkConnection::ProtectionEffort _T tolerableImpactEffort, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out subnetworkConnection::SubnetworkCon nection_T newSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Modify the specified SNC.
Parameters
Parameter sncName Input/Output Input Description SNC name Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-22
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter routeId
Input/Output Input
Description The route identifier. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. Modified SNC data
Value string
SNCModifyData
Input
subnetworkConnecti on::SNCModifyData _T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
tolerableImpact
Input
The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The indication of tries. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. This parameter is valid when the modification of the SNC is complete and the modified SNC is active. At this time, the meaning of this parameter is consistent with the meaning of the parameter for the activateSNC interface. TP data that needs to be updated. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. SNC data after modification Failure cause
tolerableImpactEffort
Input
subnetworkConnecti on::ProtectionEffort _T
emsFreedomLevel
Input
tpsToModify
Input/Output
subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T". subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nection_T string
newSNC
Output
errorReason
Output
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-23
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input data for the creation is invalid. The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
Downgrading an SDH ASON trail to an SDH trail is not supported. Upgrading an SDH trail to an SDH ASON trail is not supported. Set route constraints for an ASON trail. Modify the source and sink of a WDM trail. Add or delete the protection route for the SDH trail.
4.4.3 activateSNC
Definition
void activateSNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out subnetworkConnection::SubnetworkCon nection_T theSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activate the specified SNC.
4-24
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter sncName tolerableImpact Input/Output Input Input Description SNC name The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. TP data that needs to be updated Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
emsFreedomLevel
Input
multiLayerSubnetW ork::EMSFreedomL evel_T subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T".
tpsToModify
Input/Output
theSNC
Output
SNC data after the activation Failure cause
subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nection_T string
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input SNC name format or layer rate is invalid. The input SNC object does not exsit. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
When you input an SDH server trail, after the interface is invoked, only the server trail is activated and no client trail is activated. When you input an SDH client trail, after the interface is invoked, the client trail and the server trail for this client trail is activated. In the preceding two cases, the value of emsFreedomLevel is bigger than the value of EMSFL_HIGHER_ORDER_SNCS.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-25
4 Interface Model
4.4.4 createAndActivateSNC
Definition
void createAndActivateSNC (in subnetworkConnection::SNCCreateData _T createData, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, in EMSFreedomLevel_T emsFreedomLevel, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out subnetworkConnection::SubnetworkCon nection_T theSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create and activate an SNC.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Data for creating the SNC The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. SNC data Value subnetworkConnecti on::SNCCreateData _T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
tolerableImpact
Input
emsFreedomLevel
Input
multiLayerSubnetW ork::EMSFreedomL evel_T subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nection_T subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nectionList_T For the element model, see "SubnetworkConnec tion_T".
theSNC
Output
sncList
Output
SNC list
4-26
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter errorReaso
Input/Output Output
Description Failure cause
Value string
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
When the SNC is successfully created, no error message is returned. When the SNC fails to be activated, the failure cause is recorded in errorReason. The following table defines error codes. Error Code 1092091958 1092091968 1092092142 1092092004 Scenario The scenario that the forceUniqueness parameter is set to true is not supported. During the trail creation, protectionEffort can be EFFORT_WHATEVER only. In non-full route situation, when an SNC is created, sncType can be ST_SIMPLE only. When a service is created, the delivered parameters sncType and aEnd/zEnd do not match. The service of the specified layerRate cannot be created. Incorrect ccInclusion is input. Incorrect neTPInclusion is input. Incorrect neTPSNCExclusions is input. Incorrect AEND is input. The AEND cross-connection rate level is incorrect. Incorrect ZEND is input.
Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. 4-27
1092092024 1092092184 1092092185 1092092186 1092092187 1092092188 1092092189

Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Error Code 1092092190
Scenario The ZEND cross-connection rate level of is incorrect.
4.4.5 deactivateSNC
Definition
void deactivateSNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out subnetworkConnection::SubnetworkCon nection_T theSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate the specified SNC.
Parameters
Parameter sncName tolerableImpact Input/Output Input Input Description SNC name The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. TP data that needs to be updated. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
emsFreedomLevel
Input
multiLayerSubnetW ork::EMSFreedomL evel_T subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T
tpsToModify
Input/Output
4-28
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter theSNC
Input/Output Output
Description SNC data after activation. Failure cause.
Value subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nection_T string
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
When you input a server trail, if all client trails on this server trail are deactivated, this server trail is deactivated. Otherwise, the server trail cannot be deactivated. When you input a client trail, only the client trail is deactivated and the server trail is not affected.
4.4.6 deleteSNC
Definition
void deleteSNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete the specified SNC.
Parameters
Parameter sncName Input/Output Input Description SNC name Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-29
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter emsFreedomLevel
Input/Output Input
Description The EMS freedom level indication.
Value multiLayerSubnetW ork::EMSFreedomL evel_T
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
When you input a server trail, if a client trail exists on this server trail, the server trail cannot be deleted. If no client trail exists on the server trail, the server trail is deleted. When you input a client trail, only the client trail is deleted and the server trail is not deleted.
4.4.7 deactivateAndDeleteSNC
Definition
void deactivateAndDeleteSNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out subnetworkConnection::SubnetworkCon nection_T theSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate and delete a specified SNC.
4-30
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter sncName tolerableImpact Input/Output Input Input Description SNC name The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. The EMS freedom level indication. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
emsFreedomLevel
Input
multiLayerSubnetW ork::EMSFreedomL evel_T subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T".
tpsToModify
Input/Output
theSNC
Output
SNC data
subnetworkConnecti on::SubnetworkCon nection_T string
errorReason
Output
Failure cause
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-31
4 Interface Model
4.4.8 checkValidSNC
Definition
void checkValidSNC (in subnetworkConnection::SNCCreateData _T createData, in subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, in boolean considerResources, out boolean valid) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Check whether the creation data of are valid.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Data for creating the SNC TP data that you want to set. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. Whether to consider the resource allocation. The value can only be true and false is not supported. Check result. true indicates that the SNC is valid and false indicates that the SNC is invalid. Value subnetworkConnecti on::SNCCreateData _T subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T". boolean
tpsToModify
Input
considerResources
Input
valid
Output
boolean
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT Description The input SNC name format or layer rate is invalid.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-32
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR
Description The input SNC object does not exsit. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
None.
4.4.9 setConjunctionSNC
Definition
void setConjunctionSNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName1, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T sncName2, in boolean operate) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the association for ASON links.
Parameters
Parameter sncName1 sncName2 operate Input/Output Input Input Input Description SNC name SNC name Whether to set the association. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T boolean true indicates setting the association and false indicates canceling the association.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-33
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.4.10 swapSNC
Definition
void swapSNC (in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T nameOfSNCtoBeDeactivated, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T nameOfSNCtoBeActivated, in multiLayerSubnetWork::EMSFreedomL evel_T emsFreedomLevel, in subnetworkConnection::GradesOfImpac t_T tolerableImpact, inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify, out subnetworkConnection::SNCState_T stateOfActivatedSNC, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Switch trails.
Parameters
Parameter nameOfSNCtoBeDeactivated Input/Output Input Description The name of the SNC that you want to deactivate Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-34
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter nameOfSNCtoBeAc tivated tolerableImpact
Input/Output Input
Description The name of the SNC that you want to activate The tolerable impact level. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. The EMS freedom level indication. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. TP data to be modified. This parameter is not supported and the validity of its value is not verified. State of the SNC of nameOfSNCtoBeAc tivated after the operation is performed. Failure cause.
Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T subnetworkConnecti on::GradesOfImpact _T
Input
emsFreedomLevel
Input
tpsToModify
Input/Output
subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T For the element model, see "TPData_T". subnetworkConnecti on::SNCState_T
stateOfActivatedSNC
Output
errorReason
Output
Currently, this parameter is not handled.
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4 Interface Model
4.4.11 Notifications
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Notification on the change of the object state Notification on the route change of the object Supported Objects TopologicalLink, SNC TopologicalLink, SNC TopologicalLink, SNC, MultilayerSubnetwork SNC Remarks -
NT_STATE_CHAN GE NT_ROUTE_CHA NGE
SNC
4.5 ProtectionMgr_I
4.5.1 performProtectionCommand 4.5.2 performWDMProtectionCommand 4.5.3 Notifications
4.5.1 performProtectionCommand
Definition
void performProtectionCommand(in ProtectionCommand_T protectionCommand, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T reliableSinkCtpOrGroupName, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T fromTp, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T toTp, out protection::SwitchData_T switchData) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
4-36
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Function
Perform the SNCP protection group switching. The types of the SDH protection groups supported are as follows: Linear protection groups: 1+1 MS protection group and 1:N MS protection group. Ring protection groups: two-fiber bidirectional MS protection group and four-fiber bidirectional MS protection group. SNCP: subnetwork connection protection.
Parameters
Parameter protectionCommand reliableSinkCtpOrGroupName fromTp toTp switchData Input/Output Input Input Description Switching command Name for the protection group or SNCP sink Source switching TP Sink switching TP Switching data Value ProtectionCommand _T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T protection::SwitchD ata_T
Input Input Output
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_UNABLE_TO_COMPLY Description An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing. Invalid input. The input object does not exist. EMS cannot implement this request.
Restrictions
None.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-37
4 Interface Model
4.5.2 performWDMProtectionCommand
Definition
void performWDMProtectionCommand (in ProtectionCommand_T protectionCommand, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T wpgpName, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T fromTp, in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T toTp, out protection::WDMSwitchData_T wSwitchData) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Functions
Perform the switching for the WDM protection group. The switching commands supported are as follows: PC_CLEAR, PC_LOCKOUT, PC_FORCED_SWITCH, and PC_MANUAL_SWITCH.
Parameters
Parameter protectionCommand wpgpName fromTp toTp wSwitchData Input/Output Input Input Input Input Output Description Switching command Protection group name Source switching TP Sink switching TP Switching data Value ProtectionCommand _T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T protection::WDMS witchData_T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND
4-38
Description An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing. Invalid input. The input object does not exist.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value EXCPT_UNABLE_TO_COMPLY
Description EMS cannot implement this request.
Restriction
1:N protection group.
4.5.3 Notifications
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE NT_STATE_CHAN GE NT_PROTECTION _SWITCH NT_WDMPROTEC TION_SWITCH NT_EPROTECTIO N_SWITCH NT_IPPROTECTIO N_SWITCH Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Notification on the change of the object state Notification on the protection switching Notification on the protection switching Notification on the protection switching Notification on the protection switching Supported Objects Protection Group Protection Group Protection Group Remarks -
Protection Group
4.6 HW_MSTPInventoryMgr_I
4.6.1 setMstpEndPoint 4.6.2 createVirtualBridge 4.6.3 deleteVirtualBridge 4.6.4 createVLAN 4.6.5 deleteVLAN
4 Interface Model
4.6.6 addVLANForwardPort 4.6.7 delVLANForwardPort 4.6.8 setVLANData 4.6.9 addBindingPath 4.6.10 delBindingPath 4.6.11 setLCASState 4.6.12 createQosRule 4.6.13 setQosRule 4.6.14 createFlow 4.6.15 deleteQosRule 4.6.16 setFlow 4.6.17 deleteFlow 4.6.18 createLinkAggregationGroup 4.6.19 modifyLinkAggregationGroup 4.6.20 deleteLinkAggregationGroup 4.6.21 setMstpEndPointShapingQueue 4.6.22 setSTProtocolParam 4.6.23 setSTBridgeParam 4.6.24 setSTPortParam 4.6.25 Notifications
4.6.1 setMstpEndPoint
Definition
void setMstpEndPoint( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T endPointName,in transmissionParameters::LayeredParam eterList_T paraList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_MSTPEndPoi nt_T endPoint )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set the characteristic information about specified MSTP endpoints.
4 Interface Model
Set the Layer-2 port attributes, including the flow control attributes, working mode, maximum data packet length, and encapsulation protocol, on the WDM board. An endpoint can be a MAC port, VCTRUNK port, PRP port, logical port, ATM port, or ATM trunk port.
Parameters
Parameter endPointName paraList Input/Output Input Input Description Name of the MSTP endpoint to be set List of parameters to be set Set endpoint Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T transmissionParamet ers::LayeredParamet erList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_MSTPEndPoi nt_T
endPoint
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.2 createVirtualBridge
Definition
void createVirtualBridge( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T equipmentName, in unsigned short vbId,in string vbName,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_VirtualBridge _T vb )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-41
4 Interface Model
Function
Allow the network management system to create a virtual bridge.
Parameters
Parameter equipmentName vbId vbName vb Input/Output Input Input Input Output Description Board name Virtual bridge ID Virtual bridge name Virtual bridge object that is created Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T unsigned short string HW_mstpInventory: :HW_VirtualBridge _T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.3 deleteVirtualBridge
Definition
void deleteVirtualBridge( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T vbName )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete the specified virtual bridge.
4-42
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter vbName Input/Output Input Description Name of the virtual bridge to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.4 createVLAN
Definition
void createVLAN( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T vbName, in unsigned short vlanId,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T forwardTPList, out HW_mstpInventory::HW_VirtualLAN_ T vlan )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Create a VLAN.
Parameters
Parameter vbName Input/Output Input Description Virtual bridge name Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-43
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter vlanId forwardTPList
Input/Output Input Input
Description VLAN ID List of names for forwarding filtering ports VLAN object that is created
Value unsigned short globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_VirtualLAN_ T
vlan
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.5 deleteVLAN
Definition
void deleteVLAN( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T vlanName ) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete the specified VLAN.
Parameters
Parameter vlanName Input/Output Input Description Name of the VLAN to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-44
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.6 addVLANForwardPort
Definition
void addVLANForwardPort( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T vlanName,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T forwardTPList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_VirtualLAN_ T vlan )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Add a forwarding filtering port to the VLAN dynamically.
Parameters
Parameter vlanName forwardTPList Input/Output Input Input Description VLAN name List of the forwarding filtering ports to be added Modified VLAN object Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_VirtualLAN_ T
vlan
Output
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-45
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.7 delVLANForwardPort
Definition
void delVLANForwardPort( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T vlanName,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T forwardTPList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_VirtualLAN_ T vlan )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete a forwarding filtering port of the VLAN.
Parameters
Parameter vlanName forwardTPList Input/Output Input Input Description VLAN name List of the forwarding filtering ports to be deleted Modified VLAN object Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_VirtualLAN_ T
vlan
Output
4-46
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.8 setVLANData
Definition
void setVLANData( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T vlanName,in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_VirtualLAN_ T vlan )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set VLAN attributes. Currently, no attribute can be set, but the interface remains.
Parameters
Parameter vlanName paraList vlan Input/Output Input Input Output Description VLAN name List of attributes to be set Returned VLAN information Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_VirtualLAN_ T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-47
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.9 addBindingPath
Definition
void addBindingPath( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T endPointName, in terminationPoint::Directionality_T bindingDirect,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T pathList, out HW_mstpInventory::HW_MSTPBinding PathList_T bindingPathList )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Add a binding path for a VCTRUNK port.
Parameters
Parameter endPointName bindingDirect pathList Input/Output Input Input Input Description Endpoint name MSTP endpoint direction List of binding paths to be added Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T terminationPoint::Di rectionality_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
4-48
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter bindingPathList
Input/Output Output
Description List of trails after the binding
Value HW_mstpInventory: :HW_MSTPBinding PathList_T For the element model, see "HW_MSTPBinding Path_T".
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
1. 2. 3. The input endPointName parameter supports the VCTRUNK port only. You can bind the paths on the same port only. In the case of the tributary timeslot, you can bind the paths on the same board only. Paths of different ports cannot be specified at the same time. In addition, the rate levels should be consistent.
4.6.10 delBindingPath
Definition
void delBindingPath( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T endPointName, in terminationPoint::Directionality_T bindingDirect,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T pathList, out HW_mstpInventory::HW_MSTPBinding PathList_T bindingPathList )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete the binding path of a VC trunk.
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter endPointName bindingDirect pathList bindingPathList Input/Output Input Input Input Output Description Endpoint name MSTP endpoint direction List of binding paths to be deleted List of modified paths Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T terminationPoint::Di rectionality_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_MSTPBinding PathList_T For the element model, see "HW_MSTPBinding Path_T".
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The input endPointName parameter supports the VCTRUNK port only.
4.6.11 setLCASState
Definition
void setLCASState( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T endPointName,in boolean enableState )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set the enable state of the LCAS protocol at the VCTRUNK port.
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter endPointName enableState Input/Output Input Input Description Endpoint name Enable state of the LCAS protocol Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T boolean
Abnormal Values
Restriction
Set the enable state of the LCAS protocol at the VCTRUNK port.
4.6.12 createQosRule
Definition
void createQosRule( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T equipmentName, in HW_mstpInventory::HW_QosType_T qosType,in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList, out HW_mstpInventory::HW_QosRule_T qosRule )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Create the QoS rule.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-51
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter equipmentName qosType paraList Input/Output Input Input Input Description Board name QoS type List of parameters for the specified QoS type QoS rule created Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_QosType_T globaldefs::NVSList _T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_QosRule_T
qosRule
Output
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT Description An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing. Invalid input.
Restrictions
Set the paraList parameters for a new CAR. The attributes that can be queried and set are as follows: EnableCar, CIR, DCBS, PIR, and DMBS. In the case of an existing CAR, you can set the CIR parameter only. If you set the other parameters for the existing CAR, the errors that the parameters are not supported are returned.
4.6.13 setQosRule
Definition
void setQosRule( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T qosRuleName, in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_QosRule_T qosRule )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set the QoS rule.
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter qosRuleName paraList qosRule Input/Output Input Input Output Description QoS rule name List of parameters to be modified Modified QoS rules Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_QosRule_T
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
Set the paraList parameters for a new CAR. The attributes that can be queried and set are as follows: EnableCar, CIR, DCBS, PIR, and DMBS. In the case of an existing CAR, you can set the CIR parameter only. If you set the other parameters for the existing CAR, the errors that the parameters are not supported are returned.
4.6.14 createFlow
Definition
void createFlow( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T equipmentName, in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_Flow_T flow ) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Create a flow.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-53
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter equipmentName paraList flow Input/Output Input Input Output Description Board name Paramete list Information about the flow created Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_Flow_T
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
The parameters supported are as follows: FlowType, PortType, PortID, VlanID, Priority, FlowshapingID, VBID, VBLogicPort, SVlanID, CVlanID, and CVlanIDRange.
4.6.15 deleteQosRule
Definition
void deleteQosRule( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T qosRuleName )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete a QoS rule according to the QoS rule name.
Parameter
Parameter qosRuleName Input/Output Input Description Name for the QoS rule Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-54
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.16 setFlow
Definition
void setFlow( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T flowName,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T qosRuleNames,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_Flow_T flow ) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set the binding relation between the flow and QoS.
Parameters
Parameter flowName qosRuleNames flow Input/Output Input Input Output Description Flow name List of names for the QoS rules Flow object after the QoS rule is bound Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_Flow_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-55
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.17 deleteFlow
Definition
void deleteFlow( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T flowName )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete the specified flow according to the flow name.
Parameter
Parameter flowName Input/Output Input Description Flow name Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
4-56
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Restriction
None.
4.6.18 createLinkAggregationGroup
Definition
void createLinkAggregationGroup( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T meName, in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList,in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T mainPortName,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T branchPortNameList, out HW_mstpInventory::HW_LinkAggregati onGroup_T lag )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Create a link aggregation group (LAG).
Parameters
Parameter meName paraList mainPortName branchPortNameList lag Input/Output Input Input Input Input Output Description NE name Parameter list Main port name Standby or branch port name LAG created Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T HW_mstpInventory: :HW_LinkAggregati onGroup_T
Abnormal Values
4-57
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Restriction
None.
4.6.19 modifyLinkAggregationGroup
Definition
void modifyLinkAggregationGroup( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T lagName,in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T addedBranchPortNameList,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T deletedBranchPortNameList,out HW_mstpInventory::HW_LinkAggregati onGroup_T lag) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Modify the specified LAG.
Parameters
Parameter lagName paraList addedBranchPortNameList deletedBranchPortNameList Input/Output Input Input Input Description Name for the LAG to be modified Parameter list List of names for the standby or branch ports to be added List of names for the standby or branch ports to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
Input
4-58
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter lag
Input/Output Output
Description Modified LAGs
Value HW_mstpInventory: :HW_LinkAggregati onGroup_T
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
You can modify the nativeEMSName parameter, but the type and sharetype parameters cannot be modified.
4.6.20 deleteLinkAggregationGroup
Definition
void deleteLinkAggregationGroup( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T lagName )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete the specified LAG.
Parameter
Parameter lagName Input/Output Input Description Name for the LAG to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-59
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.21 setMstpEndPointShapingQueue
Definition
void setMstpEndPointShapingQueue( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T endPointName,in HW_mstpInventory::ShapingQueueList _T shapingQueueList)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set the shaping queue for the specified port.
Parameters
Parameter endPointName shapingQueueList Input/Output Input Input Description Endpoint name Shaping queue Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T HW_mstpInventory: :ShapingQueueList_ T For the element model, see "ShapingQueue".
4-60
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.6.22 setSTProtocolParam
Definition
void setSTProtocolParam( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T spanningTreeName,in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the protocol type for the Ethernet spanning tree, and enable or disable the protocol.
Parameters
Parameter spanningTreeName paraList Input/Output Input Input Description Name of the spanning tree Parameters of the spanning tree Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND Description Invalid input. The input object does not exist.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-61
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR
Description An internal error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
None.
4.6.23 setSTBridgeParam
Definition
void setSTProtocolParam( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T spanningTreeName,in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the parameters for the bridge of the spanning tree.
Parameters
Parameter spanningTreeName paraList Input/Output Input Input Description Name of the spanning tree Parameters of the Ethernet virtual bridge Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description Invalid input. The input object does not exist. An internal error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
4-62
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Restriction
None.
4.6.24 setSTPortParam
Definition
void setSTPortParam( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T spanningTreeName,in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T portName,in globaldefs::NVSList_T paraList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Set parameters for the port of the spanning tree.
Parameters
Parameter spanningTreeName portName paraList Input/Output Input Input Input Description Name of the spanning tree Name of the port Parameters of the port Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::NVSList _T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description Invalid input. The input object does not exist. An internal error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
None.
4 Interface Model
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Supported Objects VB, VLAN, MSTPEndPoint, QoS, FLOW, LAG VB, VLAN, MSTPEndPoint, QoS, FLOW, LAG VB, VLAN, MSTPEndPoint, QoS, FLOW, LAG, STP, STPort, STBridge VB LCAS Remarks -
Notifications on the changes of the VCTRUNK path binding are supported. Notifications on the changes of the LCAS state are supported.
NT_STATE_CHAN GE
Notification on the change of the object state
4.7 HW_MSTPProtectionMgr_I
4.7.1 performRPRProtectionCommand 4.7.2 performAtmPGProtectionCommand 4.7.3 Notifications
4.7.1 performRPRProtectionCommand
Definition
void performRPRProtectionCommand( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T nodeName,in protection::ProtectionCommand_T protectionCommand,in HW_SwitchPosition_T switchPosition,out HW_RPRSwitchData_T switchData )raises ( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Perform the external switching command on the specified RPR node.
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter nodeName protectionCommand switchPosition Input/Output Input Input Input Description The specified RPR node The switching command performed Switching position: HW_SP_NA, HW_SP_EAST, HW_SP_WEST Details of the switching Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T protection::Protectio nCommand_T HW_SwitchPosition _T
switchData
Output
HW_RPRSwitchDat a_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.7.2 performAtmPGProtectionCommand
Definition
void performAtmPGProtectionCommand( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T atmpgName,in protection::ProtectionCommand_T protectionCommand,in HW_AtmPGSwitchAction_T switchAction,in HW_AtmPGSwitchDirect_T switchDirect,out HW_AtmPGSwitchData_T switchData )raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-65
4 Interface Model
Function
Perform the external switching command on the specified ATM protection group.
Parameters
Parameter atmpgName protectionCommand Input/Output Input Input Description ATM protection group name Perform the external switching command on the specified ATM protection group Switching action: HW_ASAT_NA, HW_ASAT_SWITC H, HW_ASAT_REST ORE Switching direction: HW_ASD_NA, HW_ASD_SRC, HW_ASD_SNK, HW_ASD_BI Details of the switching Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T protection::Protectio nCommand_T
switchAction
Input
HW_AtmPGSwitch Action_T
switchDirect
Input
HW_AtmPGSwitch Direct_T
switchData
Output
HW_AtmPGSwitch Data_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.7.3 Notifications
4 Interface Model
Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE NT_STATE_CHAN GE NT_PROTECTION _SWITCH
Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Notification on the change of the object state Notification on the protection switching
Supported Objects ATM protection group, RPR node ATM protection group, RPR node ATM protection group, RPR node, RPR link attribute ATM protection group ATM protection group, RPR node
Remarks -
The notification on the protection switching for the ATM protection group or RPR node is supported.
4.8 HW_MSTPServiceMgr_I
4.8.1 createEthService 4.8.2 deleteEthService 4.8.3 createAtmService 4.8.4 deleteAtmService 4.8.5 activateAtmService 4.8.6 deactivateAtmService 4.8.7 Notifications
4.8.1 createEthService
Definition
void createEthService( in HW_EthServiceCreateData_T createData,out HW_EthServiceList_T ethServiceList )raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-67
4 Interface Model
Function
Create an Ethernet service.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Information about the Ethernet service to be created List of the Ethernet cross-connections that are created Value HW_EthServiceCre ateData_T HW_EthServiceList _T For the element model, see "HW_EthService_T ".
ethServiceList
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The creation of the EPL, EVPL, or EPLn is supported.
4.8.2 deleteEthService
Definition
void deleteEthService( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T serviceName )raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete the specified Ethernet service.
4-68
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter
Parameter serviceName Input/Output Input Description The name of the Ethernet service to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.8.3 createAtmService
Definition
void createAtmService( in HW_AtmServiceCreateData_T createData,out HW_AtmService_T atmService )raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Create an ATM VP/VC cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Information about the ATM service that you want to create Value HW_AtmServiceCre ateData_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-69
4 Interface Model
Parameter atmService
Input/Output Output
Description List of the ATM services that are created
Value HW_AtmService_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.8.4 deleteAtmService
Definition
void deleteAtmService( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T serviceName)raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Delete the specified ATM VP/VC cross-connection.
Parameter
Parameter serviceName Input/Output Input Description The name of the ATM service that you want to delete Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-70
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.8.5 activateAtmService
Definition
void activateAtmService( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T serviceName,out HW_AtmService_T atmService )raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Activate the specified ATM VP/VC cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter serviceName Input/Output Input Description The name of the ATM service that you want to delete Information about the ATM service that you want to activate Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T HW_AtmService_T
atmService
Output
Abnormal Values
4-71
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Restriction
None.
4.8.6 deactivateAtmService
Definition
void deactivateAtmService( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T serviceName,out HW_AtmService_T atmService )raises( globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException )
Function
Deactivate the specified ATM VP/VC cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter serviceName Input/Output Input Description The name of the ATM service that you want to delete Information about the ATM service that you want to deactivate Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T HW_AtmService_T
atmService
Output
Abnormal Values
4-72
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Restriction
None.
4.8.7 Notifications
The following notification is supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_STATE_CHAN GE Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of the object state Supported Objects Ethernet service object and ATM service object. Ethernet service object and ATM service object. ATM service object. Remarks -
4.9 TrafficDescriptorMgr_I
4.9.1 activateTrafficDescriptor 4.9.2 deactivateTrafficDescriptor 4.9.3 HW_createTrafficDescriptor 4.9.4 deleteTrafficDescriptor 4.9.5 Notifications
4.9.1 activateTrafficDescriptor
Definition
void activateTrafficDescriptor(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T tdName,out TrafficDescriptor_T td) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activate the specified ATM traffic descriptor.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-73
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter tdName Input/Output Input Description The name for the ATM traffic descriptor that you want to activate The ATM traffic descriptor that you want to activate Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
td
Output
TrafficDescriptor_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.9.2 deactivateTrafficDescriptor
Definition
void deactivateTrafficDescriptor( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T tdName,out TrafficDescriptor_T td) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate the specified ATM traffic descriptor.
4-74
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter tdName Input/Output Input Description The name for the ATM traffic descriptor that you want to deactivate The ATM traffic descriptor that you want to deactivate Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
td
Output
TrafficDescriptor_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.9.3 HW_createTrafficDescriptor
Definition
void HW_createTrafficDescriptor( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T meName,in TDCreateData_T newTDCreateData,out TrafficDescriptor_T newTrafficDescriptor )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create an ATM traffic descriptor.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-75
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter meName newTDCreateData Input/Output Input Input Description The NE name. The data for the ATM traffic descriptor that you want to create Information about the ATM traffic descriptor that is created Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T TDCreateData_T
newTrafficDescriptor
Output
TrafficDescriptor_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.9.4 deleteTrafficDescriptor
Definition
void deleteTrafficDescriptor( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T descriptorName) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete the specified ATM traffic descriptor.
4-76
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter
Parameter descriptorName Input/Output Input Description The name of the ATM traffic descriptor Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4.9.5 Notifications
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_STATE_CHAN GE Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of the object state Supported Objects ATM traffic descriptor ATM traffic descriptor ATM traffic descriptor Remarks Change of the activation or deactivation state of the ATM traffic descriptor
4.10 HW_controlPlaneMgr_I
4.10.1 setSRLG 4.10.2 Notifications
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-77
4 Interface Model
4.10.1 setSRLG
Definition
void setSRLG(in HW_SRLGID_T srlgID, in boolean addOrRemove, inout globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T snppLinkNameList ) raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the shared risk link group (SRLG).
Parameters
Parameter srlgID Input/Output Input Description SRLG ID Value The value of the SRLG ID ranges from 0 to 65535. 0 indicates that the object does not belong to any SRLG. boolean
addOrRemove
Input
true indicates adding and false indicates removing list of SNPP link names
snppLinkNameList
Input/Output
globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None
4-78
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE NT_ASON_RESOU RCE_CHANGE Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Notification on the change of object resources Supported Objects SNPP SNPP SNPP Remarks -
SNPP
4.11 EncapsulationLayerLinkMgr_I
4.11.1 createELLink 4.11.2 activateELLink 4.11.3 deactivateELLink 4.11.4 deleteELLink 4.11.5 increaseBandwidthOfELLink 4.11.6 decreaseBandwidthOfELLink 4.11.7 setELLinkLCASState 4.11.8 Notifications
4.11.1 createELLink
Definition
void createELLink( in ELLinkCreateData_T createData,out EncapsulationLayerLink_T theELL,out string errorReason)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create an encapsulation layer link (ELL).
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description The data of the encapsulation layer link to be created. The created encapsulation layer link. The fault cause. Value ELLinkCreateData_ T EncapsulationLayer Link_T string
theELL
Output
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description Invalid input. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restrictions
1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. The point-to-multipoint ELL is not supported. The uniqueness of userLabel is not supported. The unidirectional ELL is not supported. The untermiated ELL does not support the automatic creation of the server layer. When btname is used, the server layer cannot be created automatically. The VC4 server trail cannot be created automatically.
4.11.2 activateELLink
Definition
void activateELLink( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ellName,out EncapsulationLayerLink_T theELL, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activate a specific encapsulation layer link.
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter ellName theELL Input/Output Input Output Description The name of the ELLink The new activated encapsulation layer link. The fault reason Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T EncapsulationLayer Link_T string
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The input object does not exist. Invalid input. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
errorReason is always null.
4.11.3 deactivateELLink
Definition
void deactivateELLink ( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ellName,out EncapsulationLayerLink_T theELL, out string errorReason)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate a specific encapsulation layer link.
Parameters
Parameter ellName Input/Output Input Description The name of the ELLink. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-81
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter theELL
Input/Output Output
Description The new deactivated encapsulation layer link. The fault reason
Value EncapsulationLayer Link_T string
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
errorReason is always null.
4.11.4 deleteELLink
Definition
void deleteELLink(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ellName) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deletion a specific encapsulation layer link
Parameters
Parameter ellName Input/Output Input Description The name of the encapsulation layer link to be deleted. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
4-82
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The server layer is not deleted.
4.11.5 increaseBandwidthOfELLink
Definition
void increaseBandwidthOfELLink( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ellName,in boolean automatic, in SNCCreateDataList_T additionalSNCs,in short numberOfSNCs,in transmissionParameters::LayeredParam eterList_T transmissionParams,in globaldefs::NVSList_T additionalModificationInfo,out EncapsulationLayerLink_T newELL) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Add the bandwidth of a specific encapsulation layer link. In the case of an unterminated service, you can only add the bandwidth manually.
Parameters
Parameter ellName Input/Output Input Description The name of the encapsulation layer link to modify. Whether the bandwidth is added automatically or not. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T boolean
automatic
Input
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-83
4 Interface Model
Parameter additionalSNCs
Input/Output Input
Description List of SNCs to be added. Number of SNCs to be added. Transmission parameters Additional modification information The modified encapsulation layer link.
Value subnetworkConnecti on::SNCCreateData List_T short transmissionParamet ers::LayeredParamet erList_T globaldefs::NVSList _T EncapsulationLayer Link_T
numberOfSNCs transmissionParams
Input Input
additionalModificationInfo newELL
Input
Output
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
The transmissionParams and additionalModificationInfo fields are not processed.
4.11.6 decreaseBandwidthOfELLink
Definition
void decreaseBandwidthOfELLink( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ellName,in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T sncNames, in short numberOfSNCs,in globaldefs::NVSList_T additionalModificationInfo,out EncapsulationLayerLink_T newELL) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
4-84
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Function
Decrease the bandwidth of a specific encapsulation layer link.
Parameters
Parameter ellName Input/Output Input Description The name of the encapsulation layer link to modify. The names of the SNCs that shall removed from providing bandwidth for the ELL. The number of SNCs to be removed. Additional modification information The modified encapsulation layer link. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
sncNames
Input
numberOfSNCs additionalModificationInfo newELL
Input Input
short globaldefs::NVSList _T EncapsulationLayer Link_T
Output
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
1. 2. 3. The additionalModificationInfo field is not processed. Whether the sncNames queue length is consistent with numberOfSNCs is not checked. When the sncNames queue length is zero, the bandwidth is decreaded automatically according to numberOfSNCs.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-85
4 Interface Model
4.11.7 setELLinkLCASState
Definition
void setELLinkLCASState ( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ellName,in boolean enableState )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set the LCAS state of an encapsulation layer link.
Parameters
Parameter ellName Input/Output Input Description The name of the encapsulation layer link to set LCAS State. LCAS State enabling flag of the encapsulation layer link. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
enableState
Input
boolean
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The parameter is set directly without distinguishing the original status of the ELL.
4-86
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE NT_STATE_CHAN GE
Description Notification on creating an object Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Notification on the change of the object state
Supported Objects ELL ELL ELL
Remarks -
ELL
ELL activation and deactivation
4.12 FlowDomainMgr_I
4.12.1 createFDFr 4.12.2 activateFDFr 4.12.3 deactivateFDFr 4.12.4 deleteFDFr 4.12.5 performEthernetOAMCommand 4.12.6 Notifications
4.12.1 createFDFr
Definition
void createFDFr( in flowDomainFragment::FDFrCreateData _T createData,in ConnectivityRequirement_T connectivityRequirement,inout globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T endTPs,inout globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T internalTPs,inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify,out flowDomainFragment::FlowDomainFrag ment_T theFDFr, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException);
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-87
4 Interface Model
Function
Create a flow domain fragment.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description The FDFr Data to be created This parameter is ignored. A list of names of flow points A list of internal CPTP names that must be included in the route of the FDFr. This parameter is ignored. A list of TPs to apply. On method return the list is updated to provide the resulting parameters. The new created flow domain fragment. This parameter is ignored. Value flowDomainFragme nt::FDFrCreateData _T ConnectivityRequirement globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
connectivityRequirement endTPs internalTPs
Input Input/Output Input/Output
mfdfrs
Input/Output
flowDomainFragme nt::MatrixFlowDom ainFragmentList_T subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T
tpsToModify
Input/Output
theFDFr
Output
flowDomainFragme nt::FlowDomainFra gment_T string
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
1.
4-88
The creation of the EVPLAN is not supported.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.
The automatic creation of the ELL is not supported. The connectivityRequirement, mfdfrs, and errorReason fileds are not processed. The creation of unidirectional services, except the QinQ EvplType service, is not supported. When the createData and additionalCreationInfo fileds are set to Eplan, THE EPLAN trail is created. When the endTPs list length is 1, the unterminated trail is created. When the endTPs list length is 2, the terminated trail is created.
4.12.2 activateFDFr
Definition
void activateFDFr( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T fdfrName,out flowDomainFragment::FlowDomainFrag ment_T fdfr)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException);
Function
Activate a specific flow domain fragment.
Parameters
Parameter fdfrName fdfr Input/Output Input Output Description The name of the FDFr to activate. The activated flow domain fragment. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T flowDomainFragme nt::FlowDomainFra gment_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None
4 Interface Model
4.12.3 deactivateFDFr
Definition
void deactivateFDFr( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T fdfrName,out flowDomainFragment::FlowDomainFrag ment_T fdfr)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException);
Function
Deactivate a specific flow domain fragment.
Parameters
Parameter fdfrName fdfr Input/Output Input Output Description The name of the FDFr to deactivate. The deactivated flow domain fragment. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T flowDomainFragme nt::FlowDomainFra gment_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None
4-90
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
4.12.4 deleteFDFr
Definition
void deleteFDFr( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T fdfrName,inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify)
Function
Delete a specific flow domain fragment.
Parameters
Parameter fdfrName Input/Output Input Description The name of the flow domain fragment to be deleted. A list of TPs to apply. On method return the list is updated to provide the resulting parameters. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T flowDomainFragme nt::FlowDomainFra gment_T
tpsToModify
Input/Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-91
4 Interface Model
4.12.5 performEthernetOAMCommand
Definition
void performEthernetOAMCommand ( in EthernetOAMOperation_T operation,out EthernetLTTestResultList_T ltTestResult )raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Perform the Ethernet OAM operation.
Parameters
Parameter operation ltTestResult Input/Output Input Output Description The operation to be performed The result of Linktrace Value EthernetOAMOpera tion_T EthernetLTTestResultList
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None
The following notifications are supported. Notification Name NT_OBJECT_CRE ATION
4-92
Description Notification on creating an object
Supported Objects FDFr
Remarks -
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Notification Name NT_OBJECT_DEL ETION NT_ATTRIBUTE_ VALUE_CHANGE NT_STATE_CHAN GE
Description Notification on deleting an object Notification on the change of object attributes Notification on the change of the object state
Supported Objects FDFr FDFr
Remarks -
FDFr
FDFr activation and deactivation
4.13 MaintenanceMgr_I
4.13.1 performMaintenanceOperation 4.13.2 enablePRBSTest 4.13.3 disablePRBSTest
4.13.1 performMaintenanceOperation
Definition
void performMaintenanceOperation (in CurrentMaintenanceOperation_T maintenanceOperation, in MaintenanceOperationMode_T maintenanceOperationMode) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Set and cancel the maintenance operations of TPs.
Parameters
Parameter maintenanceOperation Input/Output Input Description Information on the maintenance operation to perform Value CurrentMaintenance Operation_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-93
4 Interface Model
Parameter maintenanceOperationMode
Input/Output Input
Description Indicates whether the maintenance operation should be operated or released.
Value MaintenanceOperati onMode_T.This field has two values: MOM_OPERATE MOM_RELEASE
Abnormal Values
Restrictions
In the case of the SDH NE, the inloop and outloop for the PTP or CTP can be set or canceled. In the case of the WDM NE, the loop for the WDM PTP can be set or canceled.
4.13.2 enablePRBSTest
Definition
void enablePRBSTest(in PRBSTestParameterList_T testParaList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T failedTPList)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Start the PRBS test.
4-94
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter testParaList Input/Output Input Description List of testing parameters Value PRBSTestParameter List_T For details of the element model, see "PRBSTestParamete r_T". failedTPList Output List of TPs that failed to be tested globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The DWDM equipment is not supported.
4.13.3 disablePRBSTest
Definition
void disablePRBSTest(in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T tpNameList,out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T failedTPList)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Stop the PRBS test.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-95
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter tpNameList Input/Output Input Description List of the TPs where the tests need to be stopped List of TPs that failed to be tested Value globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
failedTPList
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The DWDM equipment is not supported.
4.14 TCProfileMgr_I
4.14.1 HW_createTCProfile 4.14.2 HW_modifyTCProfile 4.14.3 deleteTCProfile 4.14.4 assignTrafficConditioningProfile 4.14.5 deassignTrafficConditioningProfile
4.14.1 HW_createTCProfile
Definition
void HW_createTCProfile( in HW_TCProfileCreateData_T newTCProfileCreateData, out HW_TCProfile_T newTCProfile) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
4-96
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Function
Create the traffic policy profile.
Parameters
Parameter newTCProfileCreateData newTCProfile Input/Output Input Output Description Creates data. Returned information about the traffic policy that is successfully created. Value HW_TCProfileCreate Data_T HW_TCProfile_T
Abnormal Values
Abnormal Value EXCPT_NOT_IMPLEMENTED EXCPT_INVALID_INPUT EXCPT_ENTITY_NOT_FOUND EXCPT_INTERNAL_ERROR Description The value is not supported by the U2000. Invalid input. The input object does not exist. An error of the U2000 occurs during the processing.
Restriction
Currently, the port policy, Ethernet V-UNI ingress and egress policy, PW policy, ATM policy, ATM CoS mapping, and DS domain mapping can be created.
4.14.2 HW_modifyTCProfile
Definition
void HW_modifyTCProfile( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T tcProfileName, in HW_TCProfileCreateData_T tcProfileModifyData, out HW_TCProfile_T modifiedTCProfile, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-97
4 Interface Model
Function
Modify a traffic policy profile.
Parameters
Parameter tcProfileName Input/Output Input Description Name of a traffic policy profile that needs to be modified. Information about a traffic policy profile that needs to be modified. Returned information about the traffic policy profile that is successfully modified. Returned error information. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T HW_TCProfileCreat eData_T
tcProfileModifyData
Input
modifiedTCProfile
Output
HW_TCProfile_T
errorReason
Output
string
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
4-98
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
4.14.3 deleteTCProfile
Definition
void deleteTCProfile( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T tcProfileName) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete a traffic policy profile.
Parameters
Parameter tcProfileName Input/Output Input Description Name of a traffic policy profile to be deleted. Value globaldefs::NamingA ttributes_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
None.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-99
4 Interface Model
4.14.4 assignTrafficConditioningProfile
Definition
void assignTrafficConditioningProfile( in TrafficConditioningProfileAssignList_T resourceList, out TrafficConditioningProfileAssignList_T failedResourceList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Apply a traffic policy profile to an object.
Parameters
Parameter resourceList Input/Output Input Description List of objects where the traffic policy profile is applied. Returned list of objects where the policy fails to be applied. Value TrafficConditioningP rofileAssignList_T
failedResourceList
Output
TrafficConditioningP rofileAssignList_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
Currently, the port policy and DS domain mapping are supported.
4-100
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
4.14.5 deassignTrafficConditioningProfile
Definition
void deassignTrafficConditioningProfile( in TrafficConditioningProfileDeassignList_T resourceList, out TrafficConditioningProfileDeassignList_T failedResourceList) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deassign a traffic policy profile from an object.
Parameters
Parameter resourceList Input/Output Input Description List of objects where policies are deassigned. Returned list of objects where the policies fail to be deassigned. Value TrafficConditioningP rofileDeassignList_T TrafficConditioningP rofileDeassignList_T
failedResourceList
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
Currently, the port policy and DS domain mapping are supported.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-101
4 Interface Model
4.15 Session_I
4.15.1 ping 4.15.2 endSession
4.15.1 ping
Definition
void ping ()
Function
Check whether the communication is normal.
Parameter
None
Abnormal Value
None
Restriction
None
4.15.2 endSession
Definition
void endSession()
Function
End the session connection.
Parameter
None
Abnormal Value
None
4 Interface Model
Restriction
None
4.16 HW_securityMgr_I
4.16.1 modifyPassword
4.16.1 modifyPassword
Definition
void modifyPassword(in string userName,in string oldPassword,in string newPassword) raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Modify the password of the CORBA user that has logged in currently.
Parameters
Parameter userName Input/Output Input Description Name of the CORBA user that has logged in currently Old password. New password. Value string
oldPassword newPassword
Input Input
string string
Abnormal Value
None
Restriction
None
4.17 HW_VPNMgr_I
4.17.1 createMFDFr 4.17.2 deleteMFDFr 4.17.3 activateMFDFr
4 Interface Model
4.17.4 deactivateMFDFr 4.17.5 modifyMFDFr 4.17.6 createTrafficTrunk 4.17.7 deleteTrafficTrunk 4.17.8 activateTrafficTrunk 4.17.9 deactivateTrafficTrunk 4.17.10 modifyTrafficTrunk 4.17.11 createIPCrossConnections 4.17.12 deleteIPCrossConnections 4.17.13 activateIPCrossConnections 4.17.14 deactivateIPCrossConnections 4.17.15 modifyIPCrossConnection
4.17.1 createMFDFr
Definition
void createMFDFr(in MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T createData,inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify,out MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T theMFDFr,out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T notConnectableCPTPList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T parameterProblemsTPList, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create an MFDFr.
Parameters
Parameter createData Input/Output Input Description Data of the MFDFr to be created Value MatrixFlowDomain Fragment_T
4-104
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Parameter tpsToModify
Input/Output Input/Output
Description TP list to be updated (the updated TP list in the output) Created MFDFr List of objects that cannot be connected when the MFDFr is created List of TPs at the source and sink ends where the MFDFr fails to be created Error cause
Value subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T MatrixFlowDomain Fragment_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
theMFDFr notConnectableCPTPList
Output Output
parameterProblemsTPList
Output
globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
errorReason
Output
string
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The following services can be created:
l l l l
ATM emulation service TDM emulation service EPL service EPLn service
The tpsToModify and notConnectableCPTPList parameters are not supported.
4.17.2 deleteMFDFr
Definition
void deleteMFDFr(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T mfdfrName)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-105
4 Interface Model
Function
Delete a specified MFDFr.
Parameters
Parameter mfdfrName Input/Output Input Description Name of the MFDFr to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The ATM emulation, TDM emulation, EPL, EPLn services are supported.
4.17.3 activateMFDFr
Definition
void activateMFDFr(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T mfdfrName,inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify,out MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T theMFDFr,out string errorReason)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activates a specified MFDFr.
Parameters
Parameter mfdfrName Input/Output Input Description Name of the MFDFr to be activated Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-106
4 Interface Model
Parameter tpsToModify theMFDFr errorReason
Input/Output Input or output Output Output
Description TP data to be modified MFDFr object that is in the activated state Failure cause
Value subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T MatrixFlowDomain Fragment_T string
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The tpsToModify is not supported. The ATM emulation, TDM emulation, EPL, EPLn services are supported.
4.17.4 deactivateMFDFr
Definition
void deactivateMFDFr(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T mfdfrName,inout subnetworkConnection::TPDataList_T tpsToModify,out MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T theMFDFr,out string errorReason)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate a specified MFDFr.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-107
4 Interface Model
Parameters
Parameter mfdfrName tpsToModify theMFDFr Input/Output Input Input or output Output Description Name of the MFDFr to be deactivated TP data to be modified MFDFr object that is in the deactivated state Failure cause Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T subnetworkConnecti on::TPDataList_T MatrixFlowDomain Fragment_T string
errorReason
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The tpsToModify is not supported. The ATM emulation, TDM emulation, EPL, EPLn services are supported.
4.17.5 modifyMFDFr
Definition
void modifyMFDFr(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T mfdfrName, in MFDFrModifyData_T modifyData, out MatrixFlowDomainFragment_T theMFDFr, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T notConnectableCPTPList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T parameterProblemsTPList, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
4-108
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Function
Modify a specified MFDFr.
Parameters
Parameter mfdfrName modifyData theMFDFr notConnectableCPTPList Input/Output Input Input Output Output Description Name of the MFDFr to be modified Data to be modified Modified MFDFr object Object list that fails to be connected during the modification TP lists that fail to be modified at the source and sink ends Failure cause Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T MFDFrModifyData _T MatrixFlowDomain Fragment_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
parameterProblemsTPList errorReason
Output
globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T string
Output
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The notConnectableCPTPList is not supported. The ATM emulation, TDM emulation, EPL, EPLn services are supported.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-109
4 Interface Model
4.17.6 createTrafficTrunk
Definition
void createTrafficTrunk(in TrafficTrunkCreateData_T createData, out TrafficTrunk_T theTrafficTrunk , out string errorReason)raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create a traffic trunk.
Parameters
Parameter createData theTrafficTrunk errorReason Input/Output Input Output Output Description Traffic trunk to be created New traffic trunk Error reason Value TrafficTrunkCreate Data_T TrafficTrunk_T string
Abnormal Values
Restriction
The dynamic RSVP tunnel and the IP tunnel are supported.
4.17.7 deleteTrafficTrunk
Definition
void deleteTrafficTrunk(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T trafficTrunkName)raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
4-110
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Function
Delete the specified traffic trunk.
Parameters
Parameter trafficTrunkName Input/Output Input Description Name of the traffic trunk to be deleted. Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Abnormal Value
Restriction
The dynamic RSVP tunnel and IP tunnel are supported.
4.17.8 activateTrafficTrunk
Definition
void activateTrafficTrunk(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T trafficTrunkName, out TrafficTrunk_T theTrafficTrunk, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activate the specified traffic trunk.
Parameters
Parameter trafficTrunkName Input/Output Input Description Name of the traffic trunk to be activated Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-111
4 Interface Model
Parameter theTrafficTrunk
Input/Output Output
Description Traffic trunk information after activation Error reason
Value TrafficTrunk_T
errorReason
Output
string
Abnormal Values
Restriction
4.17.9 deactivateTrafficTrunk
Definition
void deactivateTrafficTrunk(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T trafficTrunkName, out TrafficTrunk_T theTrafficTrunk, out string errorReason) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate the specified traffic trunk.
Parameters
Parameter trafficTrunkName Input/Output Input Description Name of the traffic trunk to be deactivated Traffic trunk information after deactivation Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T TrafficTrunk_T
theTrafficTrunk
Output
4-112
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Input/Output Output
Description Error reason
Value string
Abnormal Value
Restriction
4.17.10 modifyTrafficTrunk
Definition
void modifyTrafficTrunk( in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T trafficTrunkName, in TrafficTrunkModifyData_T modifyData, out TrafficTrunk_T newTrafficTrunk, out string errorReason) raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Modify the specified traffic trunk.
Parameters
Parameter trafficTrunkName modifyData theTrafficTrunk Input/Output Input Input Output Description Name of the traffic trunk to be modified Traffic trunk to be modified Traffic trunk information after modification Value globaldefs::Naming Attributes_T TrafficTrunkModify Data_T TrafficTrunk_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-113
4 Interface Model
Input/Output Output
Description Error reason
Value string
Abnormal Value
Restriction
4.17.11 createIPCrossConnections
Definition
void createIPCrossConnections( in IPCrossConnectionList_T ipCCList, out IPCrossConnectionList_T successedIPCCList, out IPCrossConnectionList_T failedIPCCList )raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Create an IP cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ipCCList Input/Output Input Description List of IP crossconnections to be created List of IP crossconnections that are successfully created List of IP crossconnections that fail to be created Value IPCrossConnectionL ist_T IPCrossConnectionL ist_T IPCrossConnectionL ist_T
successedIPCCList
Output
failedIPCCList
Output
4-114
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value
Restriction
The static tunnel and PW switch are supported.
4.17.12 deleteIPCrossConnections
Definition
void deleteIPCrossConnections(in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T ipCCNameList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T successedIPCCNameList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T failedIPCCNameList ) raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Delete an IP cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ipCCNameList Input/Output Input Description List of IP crossconnections to be deleted List of IP crossconnections that are successfully deleted List of IP crossconnections that fail to be deleted Value globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
successedIPCCNameList failedIPCCNameList
Output
Output
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-115
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value
Restriction
4.17.13 activateIPCrossConnections
Definition
void activateIPCrossConnections(in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T ipCCNameList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T successedIPCCNameList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T failedIPCCNameList, out string errorReason)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Activate an IP cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ipCCNameList Input/Output Input Description List of IP crossconnections to be activated List of IP crossconnections that are successfully activated List of IP crossconnections that fail to be activated Error reason Value globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
successedIPCCNameList
Output
failedIPCCNameList errorReason
Output
Output
4-116
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value
Restriction
4.17.14 deactivateIPCrossConnections
Definition
void deactivateIPCrossConnections(in globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T ipCCNameList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T successedIPCCNameList, out globaldefs::NamingAttributesList_T failedIPCCNameList, out string errorReason)raises (globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Deactivate an IP cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ipCCNameList Input/Output Input Description List of IP crossconnections to be deactivated List of IP crossconnections that are successfully deactivated List of IP crossconnections that fail to be deactivated Error reason Value globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T
successedIPCCNameList
Output
failedIPCCNameList errorReason
Output
Output
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-117
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value
Restriction
4.17.15 modifyIPCrossConnection
Definition
void modifyIPCrossConnection(in globaldefs::NamingAttributes_T ipCCName, in transmissionParameters::LayeredParam eters_T transmissionParams, out IPCrossConnection_T newIPCC, out string errorReason)raises(globaldefs::ProcessingFailureException)
Function
Modify an IP cross-connection.
Parameters
Parameter ipCCName Input/Output Input Description Name of the IP crossconnection to be modified. The attributes to be modified. Information about the IP crossconnection after modification. Error reason Value globaldefs::Naming AttributesList_T transmissionParamet ers::LayeredParamet ers_T IPCrossConnection_ T
transmissionParams
Input
newIPCC
Output
errorReason
Output
string
4-118
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4 Interface Model
Abnormal Value
Restriction
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
4-119
A Object Naming Rules
A
The objects contain the following: A.1 EMS A.2 Subnetwork A.3 TopoSubnetwork A.4 ProtectionSubnetwork A.5 SubnetworkConnection A.6 ManagedElement A.7 TopologicalLink A.8 EPGP A.9 PTP A.10 FTP A.11 CTP A.12 TrafficDescriptor A.13 EquipmentHolder A.14 Equipment A.15 ProtectionGroup A.16 WDM ProtectionGroup A.17 VirtualBridge A.18 VLAN A.19 Ethernet Service A.20 ATM Service A.21 ATM ProtectGroup
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object Naming Rules
This chapter lists the naming rules for various objects in the U2000 CORBA interface. The naming rules are in accordance with the TMF recommendations.
A-1
A.22 QoS Rule A.23 Flow A.24 Flow Domain A.25 FlowDomainFragment A.26 EncapsulationLayerLink A.27 LinkAggregationGroup A.28 RPRNode A.29 Routing Area A.30 SNPPLink A.31 MatrixFlowDomainFragment A.32 TrafficTrunk A.33 IPCrossConnection A.34 tcProfileName
A-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A.1 EMS
Table A-1 EMS Object name Naming rule in TMF Naming example Remarks EMS name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" If it is necessary to manage several iManager U2000s at the same time, modify the U2000 names through the NMS Maintenance Suite to ensure that each U2000 name is unique in the NMS management domain. For the details, refer to "Configuring the CORBA NBI" in iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface User Guide.
A.2 Subnetwork
Table A-2 Subnetwork Object name Naming rule in TMF Subnetwork 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="MultiLayerSubnetwork"; value="SubnetworkName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="MultiLayerSubnetwork"; value="1" Remarks Currently the MultiLayerSubnetwork vlue is always 1..
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-3
A.3 TopoSubnetwork
Table A-3 TopoSubnetwork Object name Naming rule in TMF TopoSubnetwork 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="TopoSubnetwork"; value=" TopoSubnetwork Name" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="TopoSubnetwork"; value="1" Remarks
A.4 ProtectionSubnetwork
Table A-4 ProtectionSubnetwork Object name Naming rule in TMF ProtectionSubnetwork 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ProtectionSubnetwork"; value="ProtectionSubnetworkName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ProtectionSubnetwork "; value="48" Remarks
A.5 SubnetworkConnection
Table A-5 SubnetworkConnection Object name Naming rule in TMF SubnetworkConnection 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="MultiLayerSubnetwork"; value="SubnetworkName" 3.name="SubnetworkConnection"; value="SubnetworkConnectionName"
A-4 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object name Naming example
SubnetworkConnection 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="MultiLayerSubnetwork"; value="1" 3.name="SubnetworkConnection"; value="2008-10-12 02:17:58 - 286 -wdm "
Remarks
Currently the MultiLayerSubnetwork vlue is always 1.
A.6 ManagedElement
Table A-6 ManagedElement Object name Naming rule in TMF ManagedElement 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" Remarks
A.7 TopologicalLink
Table A-7 TopologicalLink Object name Naming rule in TMF TopologicalLink 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="TopologicalLink"; value="TopologicalLinkName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="TopologicalLink"; value="2008-10-17 19:02:47 - 9" Remarks
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-5
A.8 EPGP
Table A-8 EPGP Object name Naming rule in TMF EPGP 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name=" EPGP"; value=" EPGPName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="EPGP"; value="589825/1/2/1" Remarks As for the EPGP value "589825/1/2/1", "589825" represents NE ID. The following "1" represents the Subrack ID. "2" represents the EPGP ID. The last "1" represents the extended ID.
A.9 PTP
Table A-9 PTP Object Name TMF-recommended rules for naming parameters PTP 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="PTP"; value="PTPName" Examples of the parameter names of U2000 CORBA NBIs SDH 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5/ domain=sdh/port=2"
A-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object Name
PTP WDM 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="33554433" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=590225/ slot=8/domain=wdm/ port=3" MSTP 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5/ domain=eth/type=mp/ port=1" RTN 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="3554433" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=8/ domain=rtn/port=1" PTN 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="3145433" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5/ domain=ptn/type=physical/ port=1"
Remarks
For the rules of naming the rack or shelf in a PTP name, see A.13 EquipmentHolder.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-7
Object Name
PTP MSTP In the case of the PTP in the MSTP domain, the port type can be: 1. Ethernet domain (in this case, domain=eth) mac: external Ethernet port. mp: internal Ethernet port (VCTRUNK port). rpr: resilient packet ring (RPR) Ethernet port. lp: VB logical port. For example, value="/rack=1/ shelf=1/slot=5/domain=eth/ type=lp/vb=1/port=1" for a PTP. 2. ATM domain (in this case, domain=atm) atm: external ATM port. atmtrunk: internal ATM port.
A.10 FTP
Table A-10 FTP Object name Naming rule in TMF FTP 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="FTP"; value="FTPName" Naming example WDM 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="33554433" 3.name="FTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=590225/ slot=8/domain=wdm/ port=201"
A-8
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object name
FTP PTN 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="3145433" 3.name="FTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/domain=ptn/ type=mp/port=1"
Remarks
For naming rules for the rack, shelf in a FTP name, refer to section A.13 EquipmentHolder. PTN In the case of the FTP in the PTN domain, the port type can be any of the following: mp: MP group ethtrunk: link aggregation group (LAG) EoA: virtual Ethernet port based on the ATM port EoVLAN: VLAN subport EoATM: virtual Ethernet port based on the DSL port (ATM bound group) EoEFM: virtual Ethernet port based on the DSL port (EFM bound group) serial: logical serial port ima: ATM IMA group
A.11 CTP
Table A-11 CTP Object name Naming rule in TMF CTP 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="PTP"; value="PTPName" 4.name="CTP"; value="CTPName"
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-9
Object name Naming example
CTP SDH 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5/ domain=sdh/port=2" 4.name="CTP"; value="/ sts3c_au4-j=1/vt2_tu12k=1-l=3-m=2" WDM 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value= "33554433" 3.name= "PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=590224/ slot=2/domain=wdm/ port=1" 4.name="CTP"; value="/ och=1/dsr=2" OTN 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value= "33554433" 3.name= "PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=590224/ slot=2/domain=wdm/ port=1" 4.name="CTP"; value="/ och=1/otu3=1/odu3=1/ dsr=1" MSTP 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="590174" 3.name="PTP"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=4/ domain=eth/type=mac/ port=1" 4.name="CTP"; value="/ tunnellabel=16/vclabel=0"
A-10
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object name Remarks
CTP SDH 1.For the VC3 CTP, the name format is: value="/ sts3c_au4-j=1/tu3_vc3k=2". 2. For the VC4 CTP, the name format is: value="/sts3c_au4-j=3". The VC2 CTP is not supported. 3. For the E4 level CTP included in PDH port, the name format is: value="/ sts3c_au4=1". 4. For the E3 level CTP included in PDH port, the name format is: value=" /tu3_vc3=1". 5. For the E1 level CTP included in PDH port, the name format is: value="/ vt2_tu12=1".
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-11
Object name
CTP WDM According to the actual scenario, the WDM CTP has the following six formats. 1.name="CTP"; value="/ dsr=1" Scenario: the client-side interface of the service convergence board and bidirectional wavelength conversion board 2. name="CTP"; value="/ dsr=1/och=1" Scenario: unidirectional wavelength conversion board only 3. name="CTP"; value="/ och=1/dsr=1" Scenario: line-side interface of the service convergence board 4. name="CTP"; value="/ och=1" Scenario: line-side interface of the service convergence board and bidirectional wavelength conversion board 5. name="CTP"; value="/ oms=1" Scenario: line-side interface of the multiplex board, demultiplex board and add/ drop multiplexing board 6.name="CTP"; value="/ os=1" Scenario: optical amplifier board, optical attenuation board and optical line protection (OLP) board
A-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object name
CTP OTN According to the actual scenario, OTN CTP has the following several formats: 1.name="CTP"; value="/ otu3=1"client-side interface of wavelength conversion board 2.name="CTP"; value="/ odu2=1/otu2=1/och=1" unidirectional wavelength conversion board 3. name="CTP"; value="/ och=1/otu2=1/odu2=1/ dsr=1" line-side interface bidirectional wavelength conversion board 4. name="CTP"; value="/ fragment=1/odu1=1" inverted virtual Concatenation on OTN board MSTP The Ethernet CTP is divided by adding labels of flow points to the PTP. The labels are in the following four formats. 1. For the MPLS port, the format is: name="CTP"; value="/tunnellabel=16/ vclabel=0". The tunnellabel cannot be "0". 2. For common ports, the format is: name="CTP"; value="/ethvid=0". ethvid=0: exclusive vlanid > 0 vlan: shared 3. For the QinQ port, the format is: name="CTP"; value="/ethcvid=2/ ethsvid=1". 4. For QinQ services based on port transparent transmission, the format is: name="CTP"; value="/ eth=1".
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-13
A.12 TrafficDescriptor
Table A-12 TrafficDescriptor Object name Naming rule in TMF TrafficDescriptor 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="TrafficDescriptor"; value="TrafficDescriptorName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei /U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="TrafficDescriptor"; value="101" Remarks According to the name of TrafiicDescriptor, you can locate the next traffic descriptor in an NE.
A.13 EquipmentHolder
Table A-13 EquipmentHolder Object name Naming rule in TMF EquipmentHolder 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="EquipmentHolder"; value="EquipmentHolderName" Naming example SDH NE 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="EquipmentHolder"; value="/rack=1/shelf=1/ slot=5"
A-14
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Object name
EquipmentHolder DWDM NE 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="33554433" 3.name="EquipmentHolder"; value="/rack=1/ shelf=590225/slot=1"
Remarks
Currently, the U2000 CORBA interface supports three types of EquipmentHolder objects: rack, shelf, slot, and subslot. Subshelf is not supported.
A.14 Equipment
Table A-14 Equipment Object name Naming rule in TMF Equipment 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="EquipmentHolder"; value="EquipmentHolderName" 4.name="Equipment"; value="EquipmentName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="EquipmentHolder"; value="/ rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5" 4.name="Equipment"; value="1" Remarks
A.15 ProtectionGroup
Table A-15 ProtectionGroup Object name ProtectionGroup
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-15
Naming rule in TMF
1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="PGP"; value="ProtectionGroupName"
Naming example
1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="PGP"; value="1/5/2"
Remarks
A.16 WDM ProtectionGroup

Table A-16 WDM ProtectionGroup Object name Naming rule in TMF WDM ProtectionGroup 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="WDMPG"; value="WDMPGName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="33554433" 3.name="WDMPG"; value="/pgtype=1/ shelf=590004/pgID=1" Remarks
A.17 VirtualBridge
Table A-17 VirtualBridge Object name VirtualBridge
A-16
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Naming rule in TMF
1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="vb"; value="VBName"
Naming example
1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="vb"; value="/rack=1/shelf=1/ slot=2/vb=1"
Remarks
A.18 VLAN
Table A-18 VLAN Object name Naming rule in TMF VLAN 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="vlan"; value="VlanName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="vlan"; value="/rack=1/shelf=1/ slot=2/vb=1/vlan=1" Remarks
A.19 Ethernet Service

Table A-19 Ethernet Service Object name ETH Service
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-17
Naming rule in TMF
1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="EthService"; value="EthServiceName"
Naming example
1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="EthService"; value="1/4/1/2"
Remarks
A.20 ATM Service

Table A-20 ATM Service Object name Naming rule in TMF ATM Service 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="AtmService"; value="ATMServiceName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="AtmService"; value="1" Remarks
A.21 ATM ProtectGroup

Table A-21 ATM ProtectGroup Object name Naming rule in TMF ATM ProtectGroup 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="AtmPG"; value="ATMPGName"
A-18 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Naming example
1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="AtmPG"; value="1"
Remarks
A.22 QoS Rule

Table A-22 QoS Rule Object name Naming rule in TMF QoS 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="QosRule"; value="QosName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="QosRule"; value="/rack=1/ shelf=1/slot=1/qostype=car/qos=1" Remarks
A.23 Flow
Table A-23 Flow Object name Naming rule in TMF Flow 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="Flow"; value="FlowName " Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="589825" 3.name="Flow"; value="/rack=1/shelf=1/ slot=1/flow=1"
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-19
Remarks
A.24 Flow Domain

Table A-24 Flow Domain Object name Naming rule in TMF FlowDomain 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="Flowdomain"; value="FlowDomainName " Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="Flowdomain"; value="1" Remarks Currently there is only one flow domain in the U2000.
A.25 FlowDomainFragment
Table A-25 FlowDomainFragment Object name Naming rule in TMF FlowDomainFragment 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="Flowdomain"; value=" FlowdomainName" 3.name="FlowdomainFragment "; value="FlowdomainFragmentName " Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="Flowdomain"; value="1" 3.name="FlowdomainFragment"; value="2005-12-22 16:46:07 - 54 -eth" Remarks
A-20
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A.26 EncapsulationLayerLink
Table A-26 EncapsulationLayerLink Object name Naming rule in TMF EncapsulationLayerLink 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="EncapsulationLayerLink "; value="EncapsulationLayerLinkName " Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="EncapsulationLayerLink"; value="2005-12-22 16:59:35 - 1770 -eth" Remarks
A.27 LinkAggregationGroup
Table A-27 LinkAggregationGroup Object name Naming rule in TMF LinkAggregationGroup 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name="LAG"; value="LAGName" Naming example 1.name "EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name" ManagedElement"; value="590174" 3.name "LAG"; value="262145" Remarks
A.28 RPRNode
Table A-28 RPRNode Object name RPRNode
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-21
Naming rule in TMF
1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="ManagedElementName" 3.name=" RPRNode"; value=" RPRNodeName"
Naming example
1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="590174" 3.name="RPRNode"; value=" /rack=1/ shelf=1/slot=5/node=1"
Remarks
A.29 Routing Area

Table A-29 Routing Area Object name Naming rule in TMF RoutingArea 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="RoutingArea"; value="RoutingAreaName" Naming example 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="RoutingArea"; value="1" Remarks
A.30 SNPPLink
Table A-30 SNPPLink Object name Naming rule in TMF SNPPLink 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="RoutingArea"; value="RoutingAreaName" 3.name="SnppLink"; value="SnppLinkName "
A-22
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Naming example
1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="RoutingArea"; value="1" 3.name="SnppLink"; value="3145745-1811939330-3145747-181 1939329"
Remarks
A.31 MatrixFlowDomainFragment
Object Name Naming rule in TMF MatrixFlowDomainFragment 1.name="EMS"; value="CompanyName/ EMSname" 2.name="Flowdomain"; value=" FlowdomainName" 3.name="MatrixFlowdomainFragment "; value="MatrixFlowdomainFragmentName " Naming example of parameters in U2000 CORBA interface 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="3145734" 3.name="MatrixFlowdomainFragment"; value="VSI=348|" Remarks
A.32 TrafficTrunk
Object Name Naming rule in TMF Naming example of parameters in U2000 CORBA interface TrafficTrunk None. 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="3145763" 3.name="TrafficTrunk"; value="TUNNEL=1|4|1.0.0.1|1.1.4.8|3||1||" Remarks
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
A-23
A.33 IPCrossConnection
Object Name Naming rule in TMF Naming example of parameters in U2000 CORBA interface IPCrossConnection None. 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="ManagedElement"; value="3145787" 3.name="IPCrossConnection"; value="PWSW=120|||||||||" Remarks
A.34 tcProfileName
Object Name Naming rule in TMF Naming example of parameters in U2000 CORBA interface tcProfileName None. 1.name="EMS"; value="Huawei/U2000" 2.name="TCPROFILE"; value="/ type=ATM/devtype=0/name=10"
Remarks
A-24
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B AdditionalInfo Description
B
B.1 ManagedElement_T B.2 TerminationPoint_T B.3 Equipment_T
AdditionalInfo Description
This chapter describes the usage of additional fields in each functional module of the U2000 CORBA interface. The additional fields, consisting of additionalInfo and additionalCreationInfo, have the following types:
B.4 SubnetworkConnection_T B.5 SNCCreateData_T B.6 SNCModifyData_T B.7 CrossConnect_T B.8 HW_EthService_T B.9 TrafficDescriptor_T B.10 EthernetOAMOperation_T B.11 ELLinkCreateData_T B.12 FDFrCreateData_T
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B-1
B.1 ManagedElement_T
Table B-1 ManagedElement_T Field name PhyInfo Meaning The equipment room that the NE resides Value FREE STRING Remarks An ONE does not have this field, and the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder. An ONE does not have this field, the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder.
GateWay
The NE-related gateway IP address
FIXED STRING, For example: 590175/127.0.0.1 (The first field is the NE-related GNE ID and the second field is the NE-related gateway IP address)
AlarmSeverity
The alarm of the currently highest severity on the NE
FIXED STRING Value range: "PS_CRITICAL", "PS_MAJOR", "PS_MINOR", "PS_WARNING", "PS_INDETERMINATE", "PS_CLEARED"
ShelfType
The type of the Shelf
FIXED STRING For example, " ST_TYPE1"
An ONE does not have this field, and the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder. An ONE does not have this field, and the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder.
PreConfig
The pre-config information of NE
FIXED STRING Value range: "0", "1"
B-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Field name Vendor
Meaning The name of the equipment supplier
Value FIXED STRING, The value is "HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD"
Remarks An ONE does not have this field, and the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder. An ONE does not have this field, and the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder.
MaxTransferRate
The maximum transmission rate
FIXED STRING, Value range: "155M", "622M", "2.5G", "10G", "40G", "160G", "UNKNOWN"
Subnetwork
The identifier of the affiliated subnet
FIXED STRING, The value is "SubnetWork_1"
An ONE does not have this field, and the corresponding information will be reported to the additional field of equipment holder. This field is unavailable for an optical NE. This field is not available if the port is a non-WDM port.
PSNName
The protection subnet that an NE belongs to FEC attribute of the port
FREE STRING
SupportFEC
FIXED STRING The value can be: "TRUE" "FALSE"
B.2 TerminationPoint_T
Table B-2 TerminationPoint_T Field name ServiceLoadFlag Meaning Service loading flag Value FIXED STRING Value range: "0", unloaded "1", loaded
Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. B-3
Remarks Applied to the tributary port
B.3 Equipment_T
Table B-3 Equipment_T Field name AlarmSeverity Meaning The alarm of the currently highest severity on the equipment Value FIXED STRING, Value range: "PS_CRITICAL", "PS_MAJOR", "PS_MINOR", "PS_WARNING", "PS_INDETERMINATE", "PS_CLEARED" HardwareVersion The information about the version of the hardware The port SFP information. XX indicates the port number. FIXED STRING This information is available for certain equipment. The port SFP information. Remarks
Port_XX_SFP
FREE STRING
B.4 SubnetworkConnection_T
Table B-4 SubnetworkConnection_T Field name LSPType Meaning LSP type Value FIXED STRING Value range: "LSP", normal LSP "FA_LSP", server LSP RelatedLsp Associated LSP FIXED STRING Only applied to intelligent SNCs Remarks Only applied to intelligent SNCs
B-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Field name RevertiveMode
Meaning Revertive mode
Value FIXED STRING Value range: "Revertive", revertive reroute "Non-Revertive", non-revertive reroute
Remarks Only applied to the intelligent SNC which is not unprotected or additional service.
B.5 SNCCreateData_T
Table B-5 SNCCreateData_T Field name BundledSNC Meaning Flag of the active trail Value FREE STRING When a preconfigured trail is being created, this field is to flag the active trail. FIXED STRING Value range: "true", preconfigured trail "false", nonpreconfigured trail LSPType The LSP type FIXED STRING Value range: "LSP", normal LSP "FA_LSP", server LSP A1_Timeslot The source timeslot FREE STRING The value is the specified timeslot number [1-63] when creating trails. Only applied when creating an SNC that is not all-route converged and the lower order timeslots are not specified in the CTP information. Remarks Required when creating preconfigured trails
Prefab
Whether the trail is preconfigured or not
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B-5
Field name Z1_Timeslot
Meaning The sink timeslot
Value FREE STRING The value is the specified timeslot number [1-63] when creating trails.
Remarks Only applied when creating an SNC that is not all-route converged and the lower order timeslots are not specified in the CTP information. This field is required when trails of the OC3, OC-12, OC-48, OC-192, and OC-768 types are created. The rate of a client WDM trail of the OC type is the same as the rate of a trail of the STM type. Therefore, this field is used to identify that the trail to be created is of the OC type. This field is required only when the ODU2 trail is created, because there are ODU2 trails of two rate levels in Huawei.
Region
The specified type of the trail to be created
FIXED STRING The value is fixed as SONET. That is, the trail to be created is of the OC type.
ODU2Rate
Specified rate level of the ODU2 trail to be created
FIXED STRING The value can be "ODU2E" or "ODU2".
B.6 SNCModifyData_T
Table B-6 SNCModifyData_T Field name RevertiveMode Meaning Revertive mode Value FIXED STRING Value range: "Revertive", revertive reroute "Non-Revertive", non-revertive reroute Remarks Only applied to the intelligent SNC which is not unprotected or additional service.
B-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Field name ReroutePriority
Meaning The priority of rerouting LSP
Value FIXED STRING Value range: "Low", low priority of reroute "High", high priority of reroute
Remarks Only applied to intelligent SNCs
B.7 CrossConnect_T
Table B-7 CrossConnect_T Field name Direction Meaning Whether the crossconnection is used for the positive SDH trail or the negative SDH trail. Value FIXED STRING Value range: "Reverse", for the negative SDH trail "Obverse", for the positive SDH trail ProtectionRole The role of the crossconnection FIXED STRING Value range: "Work", for working "Protection", for protection Mainly used to distinguish the working route and protection route when creating an all route trail Remarks
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B-7
Field name ClientType
Meaning The service type of WDM electrical cross-connection.
Value FIXED STRING Value range: " SDH","SONET","G BE(GFP-T) ","GBE","10GBE (LAN) ","10G BE(WAN) ","10GBE","FC","F C(Slice) ","ESCON","FICON ","FICON(Slice) ","FICON(Slice) ","ODU","OTU"," OUT(5G) ","FE","HDTV","D VB","DVB-SDI ","FDDI","HYBRID ","ISC", " INFINIBAND","CP RI","ETR"
Remarks Used in WDM electrical crossconnection.
B-8
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Field name ClientRate
Meaning The service rate of WDM electrical cross-connection
Value FIXED STRING Value range: IL_Optical_STM11 55 IL_Optical_STM23 11 IL_Optical_STM46 22 IL_Optical_STM81 250 IL_Optical_STM16 2500 IL_Optical_STM64 10000 IL_Optical_STM25 640000 IL_SAN_OC3155 IL_SAN_OC12622 IL_SAN_OC482500 IL_SAN_OC192100 00 IL_SAN_OC768400 00 IL_WDM_GEGFPT 1250 IL_SAN_GE1250 IL_ETH_10GE_LA N10000 IL_ETH_10GE_WA N10000 IL_SAN_10GE1000 0 IL_SAN_FC_25266 IL_SAN_FC_50531 IL_SAN_FC_10010 62 IL_SAN_FC_20021 24 IL_SAN_FC_40042 48 IL_SAN_FC_80085 00
Remarks Used in WDM electrical crossconnection. The integer entered is represents the service rate.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B-9
Field name
Meaning
Value IL_SAN_FC_10001 0000 IL_SAN_FC_12001 0625 IL_SAN_FC_100_S LICE1062 IL_SAN_FC_200_S LICE2124 IL_SAN_ESCON20 0 IL_SAN_FICON10 62 IL_SAN_FICON_E xpress2124 IL_SAN_FICON4G 4000 IL_SAN_FICON8G 8500 IL_SAN_FICONEX PRESS_SLICE2124
Remarks
Frequency
The frequency of WDM optical crossconnection
FIXED STRING For example, "196.000"
Used in WDM optical crossconnection.
B.8 HW_EthService_T
Table B-8 HW_EthService_T Field name snkNodeNo Meaning The number of sink node Value FREE STRING Remarks Only required when the RPR-related EVPL service, which cannot be created successfully without this field specified Used by the QinQ service to flag the labels of multiple levels
svlan
QinQ service label
FIXED STRING The value is an integer.
B-10
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B.9 TrafficDescriptor_T
Table B-9 TrafficDescriptor_T Field name SvcType Meaning The TD type flag Value FREE STRING The value is fixed as SC_UBR+. Remarks The serviceCategory field of the TD type flag of the UBR+ type is SC_NA. Therefore, this parameter is added for further explanation of the detailed type.
B.10 EthernetOAMOperation_T
Table B-10 EthernetOAMOperation_T Field name srcCCActive Meaning The enable flag of the source CC detection Value FIXED STRING Value range: "on", the detection enabled "off", the detection disabled snkCCActive The enable flag of the sink CC detection FIXED STRING Value range: "on", the detection enabled "off", the detection disabled Only applied to the CC detection Remarks Only applied to the CC detection
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B-11
B.11 ELLinkCreateData_T
Table B-11 ELLinkCreateData_T Field name ActivateStatus Meaning The activate status of an ELL Value FIXED STRING Value range: "ACTIVE", ELL activated "DEACTIVE", ELL inactivated Direction The direction of an ELL FIXED STRING Value range: "CD_UNI", unidirectional ELL "CD_BI", bidirectional ELL ReuseSnc Reuse flag FIXED STRING Value range: "Yes","No" SncUniqueID SNC ID FREE STRING Specifies whether the ELL can reuse an SNC when the ELL is created. Specifies the ID of the SNC that can be reused by the ELL when the ELL is created. Used to specify the direction of an ELL when it is being created Remarks Used to specify the activate status of an ELL when it is being created
B.12 FDFrCreateData_T
Table B-12 FDFrCreateData_T Field name ActivateStatus Meaning The activate status of FDFr Value FIXED STRING Value range: "ACTIVE", FDFr activated "DEACTIVE", FDFr inactivated Remarks Used to specify the activate status of an FDFr when it is being created
B-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Field name Direction
Meaning The direction of FDFr
Value FIXED STRING Value range: "CD_UNI", unidirectional FDFr "CD_BI", bidirectional FDFr
Remarks Used to specify the direction of an FDFr when it is being created
EPLan
Whether to create an EPLan
FIXED STRING Value range: "1", To create an EPLan "0", Not to create an EPLan
Only applied when two MAC ports are specified
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
B-13
C Lists
C
This chapter includes the following topics: C.1 Notification Event Samples C.2 IDL Description
Lists
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-1
C Lists
C.1 Notification Event Samples

C.1.1 NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event Sample C.1.2 NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event Sample C.1.3 NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event Sample C.1.4 NT_STATE_CHANGE Event Sample C.1.5 NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample C.1.6 NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample C.1.7 NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample C.1.8 NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample C.1.9 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample C.1.10 NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event Sample C.1.11 NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event Sample C.1.12 NT_HEARTBEAT Event Sample C.1.13 NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event Sample C.1.14 NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample
C.1.1 NT_OBJECT_CREATION Event Sample

Table C-1 NT_OBJECT_CREATION event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_OBJECT_ CREATION" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
name Timeout value 864000000000
filterable_data
notificationId objectName
0315155247167 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589895
C-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
Sample contents name EquipmentHolder value / rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5 name Equipment value 1 objectType objectTypeQual ifier emsTime neTime edgePointRelat ed OT_EQUIPMENT "" 20060315091343.0Z 20060315091343.0Z false
Remarks
Null
remainder_of_b ody
name
name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589895 name EquipmentHolder value / rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5 name Equipment value 1
userLabel nativeEMSNam e owner alarmReportingIndicator serviceState expectedEquipmentObjectTyp e installedEquipmentObjectTyp e installedPartNumber installedVersio n installedSerialNumber
"" S16 "" true OUT_OF_SERVICE S16(160)
S16(160)
"" 4.02 ""
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-3
C Lists
Sample contents additionalInfo name AlarmSeverity value ""
Remarks
C.1.2 NT_OBJECT_DELETION Event Sample

Table C-2 NT_OBJECT_DELETION event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_OBJECT_ DELETION" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
0315155247223 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589895 name EquipmentHolder value / rack=1/shelf=1/slot=5 name Equipment value 1
objectType objectTypeQual ifier emsTime neTime edgePointRelat ed
OT_EQUIPMENT "" 20060315094047.0Z 20060315094047.0Z false Null
C-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
C.1.3 NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE Event Sample

Table C-3 NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE_CHANGE event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_ATTRIBUTE_VALUE _CHANGE" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_hea der "" Remarks
filterable_da ta
notificationI d objectName
0315155247477 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 590174 name PTP value /rack=1/shelf=1/slot=2/ domain=eth/type=mp/port=1
objectType objectTypeQ ualifier emsTime neTime edgePointRe lated attributeList
OT_PHYSICAL_TERMINATION_POINT OT_MSTP_END_POINT 20060315114900.0Z 20060315114900.0Z false transmission Params layer 96 transmission Params layer 98 transmission Params layer 99 transmission Params name EntranceDet ect value Disable NULL
NULL
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-5
C Lists
C.1.4 NT_STATE_CHANGE Event Sample

Table C-4 NT_STATE_CHANGE event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_STATE_C HANGE" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
objectType objectTypeQual ifier emsTime neTime edgePointRelat ed attributeList
OT_MANAGED_ELEMENT "" 20060315121151.0Z 20060315121151.0Z false name communicationState value CS_UNAVAILABLE Null
C.1.5 NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample

Table C-5 NT_PROTECTION_SWITCH event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_PROTECT ION_SWITCH"
C-6 Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd. Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Remarks
C Lists
Sample contents Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header ""
Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId emsTime neTime ProtectionType switchReason layerRate groupName
0224131047672 20060224152815.0 "" PT_MSP_APS SR_RESTORED 26 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589965 name PGP value 1/1/17
protectedTP
name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589965 name PTP value /rack=1/shelf=1/ slot=5/domain=sdh/port=2
switchAwayFro mTP
switchToTP
nativeEMSNam e
Huawei/U2000;NE141;1/1/17
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-7
C Lists
Sample contents additionalInfo name ProductName value OpitX Metro 1000V3
Remarks
C.1.6 NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample

Table C-6 NT_ATMPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample Sample contents Header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_ATMPRO TECTION_SW ITCH" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId emsTime neTime pgName
0315155247622 20060315123300.0Z 20060315123300.0Z name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589895 name AtmPG value 1
switchMode protectType snkEndSwitchP ara
SingleEnded HW_APT_1PLUS1 switchReason SR_MANUAL switchState HW_SS_SWITCH additionalInfo ""
C-8
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
C.1.7 NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample

Table C-7 NT_WDMPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_WDMPRO TECTION_SW ITCH" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId emsTime neTime protectionGrou pType switchReason groupName
0223112118245 20060223043554.0Z 20060223043554.0Z 1P1 "SR_MANUAL" name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 33554438 name WDMPG value /pgtype=1/ shelf=589847/pgID=1
protectedTP
name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 33554438 name PTP value /rack=1/ shelf=589847/slot=10/ domain=wdm/port=1
switchAwayFro mTP
name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 33554438 name PTP value /rack=1/ shelf=589847/slot=11/ domain=wdm/port=1
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-9
C Lists
Sample contents switchToTP name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 33554438 name PTP value /rack=1/ shelf=589847/slot=10/ domain=wdm/port=1 nativeEMSNam e additionalInfo Huawei/U2000;otm;/pgtype=1/ shelf=NE23/pgID=1 name ProductName value OptiX BWS1600G
Remarks
C.1.8 NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample

Table C-8 NT_RPRPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_RPRPROT ECTION_SWI TCH" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId emsTime neTime nodeName
0317124742222 20060317051751.0Z 20060317051751.0Z name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 590070 name RPRNode value /rack=1/ shelf=1/slot=8/node=1
switchState
HW_SS_NA
C-10
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
Sample contents switchReason switchPosition switchParamete rs SR_NA HW_SP_NA name switchPosition value east name switchState value switch name protectType value 5 name SwitchCountTimes value 1 name ProtectCountTime value 00:00:00 name LastSwitchCommand value protection::PC_FORCED_SWITC H name switchPosition value west name switchState value switch name protectType value 4 name SwitchCountTimes value 1 name ProtectCountTime value 00:00:00 name LastSwitchCommand value protection::PC_CLEAR
Remarks
C.1.9 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample

Table C-9 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: " NT_EPROTEC TION_SWITC H" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-11
C Lists
Sample contents
Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId emsTime neTime eProtectionGroupType eSwitchReason groupName
0317093205535 20060317032501.0Z "" 1_PLUS_1 SR_NA name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589936 name EPGP value 589936/1/1/1
protectedE
switchAwayFro mE
switchToE
nativeEMSNam e additionalInfo
Huawei/ U2000;NE112;589936/1/1/1 name ProductName value OptiX 2500+
C-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
C.1.10 NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE Event Sample

Table C-10 NT_ASON_RESOURCE_CHANGE event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name:"N T_ASON_RES OURCE_CHA NGE" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
objectTypeQual ifier notifyType emsTime neTime edgePointRelat ed
OT_ROUTING_NODE OBJECT_CREATE 20060317091722.0Z 20060317091722.0Z false
C.1.11 NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS Event Sample

Table C-11 NT_PRBSTEST_STATUS event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name:"N T_PRBSTEST_ STATUS" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
Remarks
""
C-13
C Lists
Sample contents variable_header name Timeout value 864000000000
Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId TPName
0318140108344 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589849 name PTP value /rack=1/shelf=1/ slot=3/domain=sdh/port=1
TestStatus percentComplet e
FT_COMPLETED 100
C.1.12 NT_HEARTBEAT Event Sample

Table C-12 NT_HEARTBEAT event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name:"N T_HEARTBEA T" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_header "" Remarks
filterable_data
notificationId objectName objectType emsTime
03160939255 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 OT_EMS 20060316014052.0Z
C-14
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
C.1.13 NT_ROUTE_CHANGE Event Sample

Table C-13 NT_ROUTE_CHANGE event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Type_name: "NT_ROUTE_CHANGE" Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Event_name variable_hea der "" Remarks
filterable_da ta
notificationI d objectName
0316135944420 name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name MultiLayerSubnetwork value 1 name SubnetworkConnection value 2006-03-16 14:07:23-47
objectType emsTime neTime routeChange Event route
OT_SUBNETWORK_CONNECTION 20060316061019.0Z "" RerouteCom pleted 0 active:true direction: CD_UNI cctype: ST_SIMPLE aEndNameL ist name EMS value Huawei/ U2000 name ManagedEle ment value 589844
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-15
C Lists
Sample contents name PTP value / rack=1/ shelf=1/ slot=12/ domain=sdh/ port=1 name CTP value / sts3c_au4j=4 zEndNameL ist name EMS value Huawei/ U2000 name ManagedEle ment value 589844 name PTP value / rack=1/ shelf=1/ slot=8/ domain=sdh/ port=1 name CTP value / sts3c_au4j=16 additionalInf o name Direction value Obverse
Remarks
active:true direction: CD_UNI cctype: ST_SIMPLE aEndNameL ist name EMS value Huawei/ U2000
C-16
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
Sample contents name ManagedEle ment value 589845 name PTP value / rack=1/ shelf=1/ slot=7/ domain=sdh/ port=1 name CTP value / sts3c_au4j=16 zEndNameL ist name EMS value Huawei/ U2000 name ManagedEle ment value 589845 name PTP value / rack=1/ shelf=1/ slot=8/ domain=sdh/ port=1 name CTP value / sts3c_au4j=4 additionalInf o name Direction value Obverse
Remarks
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-17
C Lists
C.1.14 NT_IPPROTECTION_SWITCH Event Sample

Table C-14 NT_EPROTECTION_SWITCH event sample Sample contents header fixed_header Event_type Domain_name: "tmf_mtnm" Type_name: " NT_IPPROTE CTION_SWIT CH" Event_name variable_header "" Remark
filterable_data
notificationId emsTime neTime eProtectionGroupType eSwitchReason groupName
0317093205535 20100117032501.0Z "" 1_PLUS_1 SR_NA name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589936 name IPPGP value 589936/1/1/1
protectedE
switchAwayFro mE
name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589936 name EquipmentHolder value / rack=1/shelf=1/slot=8
C-18
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C Lists
Sample contents name Equipment value 1 switchToE name EMS value Huawei/U2000 name ManagedElement value 589936 name EquipmentHolder value / rack=1/shelf=1/slot=7 name Equipment value 1 nativeEMSNam e additionalInfo Huawei/ U2000;NE112;589936/1/1/1 name ProductName value OptiX PTN 3900
Remark
C.2 IDL Description

Refer to the iManager U2000 V100R002C01 Northbound CORBA Interface Reference Guide.zip.
NOTE
The iManager U2000 V100R002C01 Northbound CORBA Interface Reference Guide.zip is available on the Huawei technical support website. To obtain this document, contact the local technical support engineers.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
C-19
D Glossary
D
This appendix lists the glossary used in the guide. 1 1+1 optical path protection
Glossary
At the place where the signals are input, the same channel of optical signals are input to two boards or ports of the WDM equipment through two fibers. The two boards or ports are backed up mutually. When a fault occurs to the working path, the input end of the WDM equipment switches to the protection path. If the working path recovers, the input end of the WDM equipment switch back to the working path.
A Access Control List (ACL) Access Control List (ACL) is a list of IP address. The addresses listed in the ACL are used for authentication. If the ACL for the user is not null, it indicates that the address where the user logged in is contained in the list. For SDH, the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services are consecutive in terms of their service in the frame structures, so that they use the same path overhead (POH). A visible or an audible indication to notify the person concerned that a failure or an emergency has occurred. See also Event. Alarm Indication Signal. A signal sent downstream in a digital network if an upstream failure has been detected and persists for a certain time.
Adjacent Concatenation
Alarm
AIS
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-1
D Glossary
Alarm acknowledgement
The process during which when an alarm is generated, the operator needs to acknowledge the alarm and take the right step to clear the alarm. If there are excessive errors in a channel, AIS can be inserted in this channel to indicate it is unavailable. For a line board, you can set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B1, B2 and B3 bytes. For a tributary board at the E1 or T1 level, you can set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in BIP-2. For a tributary board at the E3 level or higher, you can set whether to insert AIS when there are excessive errors in the B3 byte. Alarm delay includes start delay and end delay. An alarm is not regarded as being generated until the NE has been detecting it for a period of time, and this period of time is the alarm start delay time. An alarm is not regarded as being cleared until the NE has been detecting the ending of it for a period of time, and this period of time is the alarm end delay time. Setting the delay time can avoid the generation of unnecessary alarms due to misreport or jitter. For the port that has already been configured but has no service, this function can be used to avoid generating relevant alarm information, thus preventing alarm interference. The suppressed alarm of a specific object is not reported. The object here may be the networkwide equipment, a specific NE, a specific board and even a specific function module of a specific board. Automatic Level Control. A technique (procedure) to automatically reduce the output power of optical amplifiers to avoid exposure to hazardous levels. The entire capacity of the adapted or characteristic information is set to logic "1". The ALS function of an optical line system automatically switches off the transmitter of a regenerator section in case of cable break in this section.
AIS insertion
Alarm delay time
Alarm reversion
Alarm suppression
ALC
All-ONEs ALS
D-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
APS
Automatic Protection Switching. Autonomous switching of a signal between and including two MS_TT, Sn_TT, or Sm_TT functions, from a failed working trail/ SNC to a protection trail/SNC and subsequent restoration using control signals carried by the K-bytes in the MSOH, HO POH, or LO POH. The rate/work mode of the communication party set as self-negotiation is specified through negotiation according to the transmission rate of the opposite party. Property of an object.
Auto-negotiation
Attribute B Bidirectional (protection) switching
For a unidirectional fault, both directions (of the trail, subnetwork connection, and so on), including the affected and unaffected direction, are switched. When the bit error reaches a specific limit, the equipment will report an alarm. This limit is the bit error alarm threshold. The threshold can be divided into crossing threshold and defect threshold. The unidirectional services from one service source to multiple service sinks are called the broadcast service.
Bit error alarm threshold
Broadcast service
C Concatenation When the standard virtual containers (including VC4/VC3/VC12/VC11) are incapable of carrying the volume of a SDH signal, the containers can be concatenated to function as a larger container. Class of Service. CoS keeps the priority mapping rules. It works in internal ports, especially when there is congestion, CoS is even more important. The services at different levels are processed according to the corresponding priorities. The service with higher priority is processed first and the service with lower priority is discarded when the bandwidth is insufficient.
CoS
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-3
D Glossary
Client trail
There is an inclusion relation between the trails of different levels, for example, a trail of a certain level contains multiple trails of lower levels. In such a structure, the lower level trail is called the client trail. Characteristic Information. The information passing across a CP or TCP. It is a signal with a specific format, which is transferred on "network connections". The specific formats will be defined in the technology specific Recommendations. A kind of terminal (PC or workstation) connected to a network that can send instructions to a server and get results through a user interface. See also server. The data of a trail at the NE layer is changed. After the trail is re-searched, the original trail becomes a collision trail. Class of Service. CoS keeps the priority mapping rules. It works in internal ports, especially when there is congestion, CoS is even more important. The services at different levels are processed according to the corresponding priorities. The service with higher priority is processed first and the service with lower priority is discarded when the bandwidth is insufficient. Network services are realized through the cross-connections of NEs. The crossconnection is the connection of channels between the tributary board and the line board, or between line boards inside the NE. Alarms that do not clear, or has cleared but is not acknowledged. The performance data stored in the current register is called current performance data. The current 15-minute or 24-hour register (only one for each) is applied to collect the performance data in the current monitoring period. It changed within the monitor period.
CI
Client
Collision trails
CoS
Cross-Connection
Current alarms Current performance data
D-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
Custom view
The user-defined view is a subset on the Main Topology. Included network entities can be NE, network management system, link and subnetwork. Generally, the network management personnel need to customize some views and select the network entity under their management from the Main Topology. The Clock View provides a visible platform to implement the clock management function.
Clock View
D Data interface service The service that uses the F1 byte in an SDH frame or some undefined bytes to transmit information such as call charge, network management system information and power supply monitoring. Data Communications Channel. The data channel that uses the D1-D12 bytes in the overhead of an STM-N signal to transmit information on operation, management, maintenance and provision (OAM&P) between NEs. The DCC channels that are composed of bytes D1-D3 is referred to as the 192 kbit/s DCC-R channel. The other DCC channel that are composed of bytes D4-D12 is referred to as the 576 kbit/s DCC-M channel. The cross-connection that exists on an NE but cannot form trails on the network management system. A procedure that involves duplicating data from a NetWare partition on one hard disk to the NetWare partition on another disk. Disk mirroring pairs multiple hard disks on the same channel, and like disk duplexing, writes data to both the original and secondary disk. If the original disk fails, the secondary disk automatically takes over. Disk mirroring cannot protect against failures that occur along the channel between the disks and the NetWare server, because the duplicate disks exist on the same channel.
DCC
Discrete service
Disk Mirroring
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-5
D Glossary
DNI
Dual node interconnection is an architecture between two rings where two nodes in each ring are interconnected. The two interconnections between the two rings can be arranged to provide protection of the traffic crossing from one ring to the other.
E Extra traffic During fault-free conditions, it is possible to use the protection channels to carry additional traffic. This additional traffic, which is referred to as extra traffic, has lower priority than the normal traffic on the working channels and has no means for protection. An aggregate of multiple managed equipment. Equipment set facilitates the user authority management on equipment in the management domain of the network management system. If some operation authorities over one equipment set are assigned to a user (user group), these operation authorities over all equipment of the equipment set are assigned to the user (user group). Embedded Control Channel. An ECC provides a logical operations channel between SDH NEs, utilizing a data communications channel (DCC) as its physical layer. Environment Monitoring Unit. A type of power and environment monitoring unit that is used to monitor the environment variables, such as the power supply and temperature. With external signal input through the relay, fire alarm, smoke alarm, burglary alarm, and so on can be monitored as well. This command tests whether a switching protocol can work normally without completing the actual switching operation. This command exercises ring protection switching of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are checked, but no working traffic is affected.
Equipment set
ECC
EMU
Exercise switching
Exerciser - Ring
D-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
Exerciser - Span
This command exercises span protection of the requested channel without completing the actual bridge and switch. The command is issued and the responses are checked, but no working traffic is affected. The serial number of a subnetwork where an NE resides, which is usually used to distinguish different network segments. An extended ID and an ID form the physical ID of an NE. An unprotected chain like ADM-ADM-TM or ADM-ADM-ADM. The end-point NEs of a link is of the ADM type. As this type of protection subnetwork can be extended, we name it extended protection subnetwork.
Extended ID of NE
Extended protection subnet
F Failure The fault cause persisted long enough to consider the ability of an item to perform a required function to be terminated. The item may be considered as failed; a fault has now been detected. A fault is the inability of a function to perform a required action. This does not include an inability due to preventive maintenance, lack of external resources, or planned actions. The user path byte, which is reserved for the user but usually it is special for network providers. The F1 byte is mainly used to provide the temporary data or voice path for special maintenance objectives. It belongs to the regenerator section overhead byte. The user channel bytes. These two bytes provide the user with the communication between path units related to payload. They belong to the higher order path overhead byte. The general name of optical fiber and cable. The physical entity that connects transport equipment in a transport network, bears the transmitted object (user information, network management information) and implements the transport function.
Fault
F1 byte
F2,F3 bytes
fiber/cable
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-7
D Glossary
Forced switching
This command performs the ring switch from working channels or boards to the protection channels or boards. This switch occurs regardless of the state of the protection channels or boards, unless the protection channels or boards are satisfying a higher priority bridge request. The system that can transmit information in both directions on a communication link. In this search mode, the network management system first deletes all the trail data on the network management system and reserves the service configuration data of respective NEs, and then re-searches for the service configuration data of respective NEs on the network management system to form the new trail information. In the full search mode, all the trail information on the network management system will be deleted first (Only the trail information at the network layer on the network management system is deleted, while the service configuration information of NE in NE layer on the network management system and on the NE still remain). Then the service configuration information of respective NEs in the NE layer on the network management system is researched to form the trail information in the network layer on the network management system.
Full duplex Full filtering trail
Full search
G Gateway The equipment that is used to connect two independent networks that use different communication protocols. IP address is used for TCP/IP communication between an NE and the network management system, which is effective only when it is used for TCP/IP communication. That is, only the gateway NE needs the IP address. IP address cannot be used to identify an NE uniquely. NEs in different TCP/IP networks may have the same IP address. And one NE may have several IP addresses (for example: an IP address of a dial-up network, an IP address of the Ethernet port and so on).
Gateway IP
D-8
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
Gateway NE
The NE that communicates with the NMS and other NEs through a data communication network.
H Host name Name of the computer that functions as a main controlling point in a network and provides special service to the users. The ability of a system to continuously perform its functions during a long period, which may exceeds the suggested working time of the independent components. You can obtain the high availability (HA) by using the error tolerance method. Based on learning cases one by one, you must also clearly understand the limitations of the system that requires an HA ability and the degree to which the ability can reach. Alarms that have cleared and been acknowledged. The performance data stored in the history register and the auto-report performance data stored on the network management system are called history performance data in a unified way.
High Availability
History alarms History performance data
I In-Service Trail Modifying A way of trail modification that allows you to configure new routes for a trail and enables the system to automatically delete the original trail after you apply the settings to the NE. In this search mode, the network management system first reserves the trail data of the current client and then re-searches the service configuration data of respective NEs on the network management system according to the newly given search condition to form the new trail data and combine it with the original trail data to get the result.
Incremental filtering trail
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-9
D Glossary
Incremental search
The increment search mode compares the trail information in network layer on the network management system with the service configuration information of respective NEs on the network management system. If they are inconsistent, the trail information will be fed back into the list as an "Inconsistent Trail". When the user has deleted the inconsistent trail information, the system will re-search for the service configuration information that has not formed the trail in the NE layer on the network management system. An output signal is returned back to the corresponding input port. This function is implemented by the wavelength conversion boards that are capable of dual fed and selective receiving. The dual fed is implemented by adding a passive optical splitter to the tributary. The signal selection is implemented by the SCC turning off the laser at the tributary side with poorer signal quality according to the signal quality of the lines of two wavelength conversion boards, and letting the channel of light with higher quality pass through the coupler. The coupler is also a passive device and only one channel of light can pass through it. If there are two channels of light passing through the coupler, they interferes each other that would cause bit error to the service. Hence, it is necessary to ensure that only the channel of light with higher quality pass through the coupler at the same time. A concept in the telecommunications area. A site that manages fiber/cable or grooms services
Inloop Inter-board wavelength protection
Intermediate office
D-10
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
Intra-Board wavelength protection
The intra-board wavelength protection is mainly implemented by the wavelength conversion board with dual fed and signal selection function. The dual fed is implemented by the optical divider inside the board, while the signal selection is implemented by the board turning off the laser of one of the receiving optical interfaces. Hence, this protection mode is also called optical wavelength intra-board path protection. The switching in this protection mode can be completed within a short time, but the services must be interrupted during the maintenance of the damaged board or equipment. Hence, this protection mode has a relatively lower reliability. Internet Protocol Address. A 32-bit address that uniquely identifies a node in an IP Internet network. An IP address consists of a network ID and a unique host ID. An IP address consists of the decimal values of its eight bytes, separated with periods; for example, 192.168.7.27. A type of special NE or an optical port on an NE. Logically, an isolated node does not comprise an SDH NE of any types, which are TM, ADM, REG and DXC
IP address
Isolated node
L Layer A concept used to allow the transport network functionality to be described hierarchically as successive levels; each layer being solely concerned with the generation and transfer of its characteristic information. A permission provided by a vendor to authorize the use of specific functions of a product. Usually the license consists of encrypted codes, and the operation authority varies with different level of license. Services are not switched to the protection board or channel when a fault occurs, if currently no switching takes place. If currently the switching takes place, after the working board or channel recovers to normal, the services are not switched back to the working board or channel.
License
Lock status
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-11
D Glossary
Lockout of Switching
When the switching condition is satisfied, this function disables the service from being switched from the working channel to the protection channel. When the service has been switched, the function enables the service to be restored from the protection channel to the working channel. The client login mode includes single-user and multi-users login modes. The multi-users mode is the default mode.
Login mode
M Management flag A check box helps you to determine whether the trail is a managed object of the trail management function at the network layer. By default, trails are managed objects. If choosing not to manage it through the trail management function, you can manage the cross-connections of an individual NE through the service configuration function performed at a node. The information that is used for network management in a transport network. When the protection channel is efficient and there is no higher-level switching request, services are manually switched from the working channel to the protection channel, thus testing whether the network still has the protection capability. The WDM network node that has the spectrum analysis unit in the link for which the ALC function is configured. It is a protection mode in which multiple services with different trails but with the same sink protect an important service with the same sink. This protection mode supports protecting important services through nonoptical network trails, such as microwave. It presently supports that three protection trails protect one service trail. At the trail sink, it monitors the quality of protection trail signals and protects important services according to the priority and the signal quality. The default network management system client interface, and all topology management functions are accessed here.
Management information Manual switching
MS node
Multi-trail protection service
Main Topology
D-12
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
NE
Network Element. NE includes the hardware unit and the software running on it. Usually, one NE has at least an SCC (system control and communication) board which responsible for the management and monitoring of the NE. The NE software runs on the SCC board. The NE configuration data saved on the SCC board of the equipment, which can be uploaded to the network management system and then stored in databases on the network management system NE side. The logical layer of the network management system that saves the network data. The configuration data related to a network is saved in databases. Network Node Interface. The interface at a network node which is used to interconnect with another network node. See also SDH NNI. In non-revertive switching, there is a working and protection line, board and so on. Services remain on the protection line or board if the switch requests are terminated; that is, when the fault that caused them to switch to the protection line or board is cleared. The databases that are saved in an NE. Usually, the databases are saved in the SCC board of an NE. In a network, each NE corresponds to a unique identifier, that is, the NE ID. In the OptiX transmission equipment, it is specified that the NE ID is a 24-bit binary digit, that is, three bytes. The DIP switch on the SCC board of the NE constitutes the lower 16 bits of the NE ID. The higher eight bits of the NE ID is the extended ID (default value: 9), which is also called the subnetwork number. The extended ID is usually used to identify different subnetworks. Network Management. A subnet that has no protection. The range of IP addresses in which the gateway NE functions.
NE side
Network layer
NNI
Non-revertive
NE database
NE ID
NM Non-protection subnet Network segment
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-13
D Glossary
NE Explorer
The main operation interface, of the NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM, which is used to manage the OptiX equipment. In the NE Explorer, the user can configure, manage and maintain the NE, boards, and ports on a per-NE basis. A graphical user interface, of the network management system, which displays subracks, boards, and ports on an NE. In the NE Panel, the user can complete most of the configuration, management and maintenance functions for an NE.
NE Panel
O Outloop OWSP An input signal is directly returned back to the corresponding output port. Optical Wavelength Shared Protection. OWSP is a bidirectional ring, where each node is equipped with an OWSP. There are two channels (1 and 2) in the main optical path on the internal and external rings in each span on a ring. The fibre and the OWSP on the main optical path are connected with the optical ports inputting 1 and 2 on the mux/ demux board (unnecessary to be connected with the OTU), and thus 1 and 2 can be added and dropped at every node.
P Path Path protection A trail in a path layer. The working principle of path protection: When the system works in path protection mode, the PDH path uses the dual fed and signal selection mode. Through the tributary unit and cross-connect unit, the tributary signal is sent simultaneously to the east and west lines. Meanwhile, the cross-connect unit sends the dual fed signals from the opposite end to the tributary unit, and the tributary unit selectively receive the signal from the two signals. The memory space that is used to store performance events. A threshold mechanism can be used to generate an autonomous event report when the performance of a transport entity falls below a predetermined level.
Performance register Performance threshold
D-14
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
PMU Protection policy
The unit that is used to monitor power supply in the equipment. In case the service route provides multiple service protections, different protection strategies can be selected as required. Protection strategy refers to the protection mode given the priority in use for the trail: protection, no protection, and extra traffic. Of the above, the protection preference is divided into trail protection and sub-network connection protection. A network concept in the network management system. A protection subnet is not an MSP ring or a path protection ring. A protection subnet consist of NEs and fiber connections. The status of the protocol controller of the protection subnet of the MSP or SNCP type. The statuses are not started, started, starting, partially started. A major separate area of a window or dialog box, usually used for display rather than data entry.
Protection subnet
Protocol controller status
Pane
R Remote Network Monitoring (RMON) A manage information base (MIB) defined by the Internet Engineering Task Force (IETF). RMON is mainly used to monitor the data flow of one network segment or the entire network. In revertive operation, the traffic signal (service) always returns to (or remains on) the working SNC/trail if the switch requests are terminated; i.e. when the working SNC/trail has recovered from the defect or the external request is cleared. Resource sharing means that a physical link resource may belong to multiple protection subnetworks. The path that a trail passes through. The constraint conditions for calculating a route. When creating a trail, the user can specify the explicit route and the NEs that the trail cannot pass. The explicit route and the NEs are the constraints for calculating the route.
Revertive switching
Resource sharing
Route Route constraint
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-15
D Glossary
ROADM
Reconfiguration Optical Add/Drop Multiplexing. ROADM helps you to terminate or pass through any one wavelength at every node without affecting the existing services. At the same time, ROADM can change wavelengths through the network management system remotely, to adjust wavelengths added or dropped in a quick and convenient manner. In addition, ROADM enables power equalization at path level through a built-in power equalization function, and thus adjusts power for passthrough paths in a better way than a bandbased dynamic gain equalizer (DGE) does.
S Section S1 byte A trail in a section layer. To implement protection switching of clocks in the whole network, the NE must learn about the clock quality information of the clock reference source it traces. Therefore, ITU-T defines S1 byte to transmit the network synchronization status information. The IPA safe switch is set in consideration of the long-span networking requirement, which cannot allow too low output optical power. If the safe control switch is turned off, IPA restarting optical power is the specified output power of the OAU. Otherwise, the IPA restarting optical power is restricted to less than 10 dBm. It is the text file describing the physical information and configuration information of the entire network, including the Networkwide Configuration File, NE Port Naming File , NE Configuration File, NE List File, NM Computer Information File, Service Actualization Script, Network Layer Information File, Network Modeling and Design Information File and ASON Information File. SD refers to signal degradation. The multiplex section protocol defaults to start switching in case of signal loss. In practice, signal degradation severely affects some services, so protection switching is needed. Or, you can turn off this trigger condition through the switch to avoid MS switching when the signal degrades.
Safe control switch
Script file
SD trigger condition
D-16
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
SD
Signal Degrade. A signal indicating the associated data has degraded in the sense that a degraded defect (dDEG) condition is active. A trail that spans both the SDH and ASON domains. Signal Fail. A signal indicating the associated data has failed in the sense that a near-end defect condition (not being the degraded defect) is active. SDH Network Node Interface. It is applied to build communications connection with the equipment beyond the management area of the network management system. Usually, the NM creates an SDH NNI by creating a logical system on the port of an idle line board, and the NE must be a TM without protection and fiber connection. The range of searching for NEs. There is an inclusion relation between the trails of different levels, for example, a trail of a certain level contains multiple trails of lower levels. In such a structure, the bearer trail that bears another trail of lower level is called the server trail. In this search mode, the NM re-searches the trail data displayed by the current client according to the given search conditions, helping the customer find the trail data which interests him the most. A menu that is displayed when right-clicking an object's name or icon. Also called a context menu. The ECC channel realized by means of serial port. The route of a service clock from the source to the sink in a WDM system. The working route can be in the form of point-to-point or broadcast (That is, an input clock source corresponds to multiple output clock sources).
SDH-ASON Trail SF
SDH NNI
Search domain Server trail
Secondary filter trail
Shortcut menu
Serial port extended ECC Service clock working route
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-17
D Glossary
Service configuration policy
When pass-through services are configured on the newly added nodes, the mode of highorder or low-order to pass through can be selected. When the VC12 service over a VC4 exceeds a preset threshold, higher order cross-connect is selected, otherwise lower order cross-connect is selected. When the services are not VC12 ones, they are converted into VC12 equivalents. For example: if there are two VC3 and four VC12 services on a VC4, there should be 21x2+4 = 46 VC12 services. To indicate the status of loading services in an SDH frame by using the C2 or V5 byte in the SDH path overhead. An agreement signed between the network carrier and the client, concerning the treatments that the client can receive when services are transferred in the network. The agreement contains the information on technology and commerce. Usually, SLA refers to a specific QoS. Serial Line Interface Protocol, defines the framing mode over the serial line to implement transmission of messages over the serial line and provide the remote host interconnection function with a known IP address. The network that consists of a group of interconnected or correlated NEs, according to different functions. For example, protection subnet, clock subnet and so on. Subnetwork connection protection uses the 1 +1 mode. SNCP is of 1+1 protection mode. Payloads are transmitted simultaneously on both the working and the protection subnetwork connections. When the working subnetwork connection fails, or when its performance deteriorates to a certain level, at the receiving end of the sub-network connection, the signal from the protection sub-network connection is selected according to the preference rule. Switching usually takes the single-end switching mode, thus no protocol is needed.
Service loading indication
SLA (Service Level Agreement)
SLIP
Subnet
Subnet connection protection
D-18
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
Subnet mask
Also referred to as the network mask off code, it is used to define network segments, so that only the computers in the same network segment can communicate with one another, thus suppressing broadcast storm between different network segments. Subnetwork number is used to differentiate the different network sections in the subnetwork conference. Actually it is the first several digits (one or two) of the user phone number. An orderwire phone number is composed of the sub-network number and the user number. The SNCP node of a ring subnet that can support the ability to dually feed and selectively receive trails. In this way, subnet connection protection is realized . Usually, the node of the path protection type is set as an SNCP node. The spread type of ATM service includes point-to-point (p2p) and point-to-multipoint (including p2mpRoot and p2mpLeaf). There may be the case that several protected boards need to be switched; thus the tributary board switching priority should be set. If the switching priority of each board is set the same, the tributary board that fails later cannot be switched. The board with higher priority can preempt the switching of that with lower priority. When synchronizing the alarms, the network management system checks the alarms in the network management system database and the alarms in the NE. If they are inconsistent, the alarms in the NE are uploaded to the network management system database and overwrite the old ones. To re-upload all services carried on the physical fiber links. To apply the system time of the network management system server to NEs so as to keep the time of all NEs consistent.
Subnet number
SNCP node
Spread type
Switching priority
Synchronize Alarm
Synchronize Fiber Service Synchronize NE time
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-19
D Glossary
Tag/Untag
The Ethernet port that can identify and transmit the packets with an 802.1q tag header is referred to as a Tag port; otherwise it is referred to as an Untag port. A source NE or a sink trail. The network management system topology is a basic component of the man-machine interactive interface. The topology clearly shows the structure of the network, the alarms of different NEs, sub-networks in the network, the communication status as well as the basic network operation status. It is the traffic frame discard control. Two options are provided: enable and disable. It indicates the means by which the NE discards cells when the network is congested. When the frame discard mark is closed, the cells will be discarded at the cell level; when it is opened, they will be discarded at the frame level. Here, "frame" refers to the AAL protocol data unit. A "transport entity" which consists of an associated pair of "unidirectional trails" capable of simultaneously transferring information in opposite directions between their respective inputs and outputs. Check whether the circuit route and the activation status of the NM side and NE side are the same, clear the superfluous MOs and combine some of the circuits. During network expansion, such an operation as adding fibers to the SDH NNI or configuring/deleting services through the configuration layer will result in circuit inconsistency. A network level management function of the network management system. Through trail management, you can configure end-to-end services, view graphic interface and visual routes of a trail, query detailed information of a trail, filter, search and locate a trail quickly, manage and maintain trails in a centralized manner, manage alarms and performance data by trail, and print a trail report.
Terminal NE Topology
Traffic frame discard flag
Trail
Trail consistency check
Trail management function
D-20
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
Trail View
The user interface of the network management system, that is used to manage trails based on topologies. The Trail View helps the user to quickly configure and maintain trails. See also Protection View, Clock View. The route that consists of the physical media (such as fibers and NEs)that a trail passes through. A route that bears Ethernet services in the network management system. The equipment level protection that uses one standby tributary board to protect N tributary boards . When a fault occurs on the working board, the SCC issues the switching command, and the payload of the working board can be automatically switched over to the specified protection board and the protection board takes over the job of the working board . After the fault is cleared, the service is automatically switched to the original board
Transmission media layer route
Trunk link TPS protection
U Upper threshold UAT The value that can generate a performance threshold crossing if exceeded. Unavailable Time. A UAT event is reported when the monitored object generates 10 consecutive severely errored seconds (SES) and the SESs begin to be included in the unavailable time. The event will end when the bit error ratio per second is better than 10-3 within 10 consecutive seconds. Unidirectional (Protection) Switching . For a unidirectional fault (that is, a fault affecting only one direction of transmission), only the affected direction (of the trail, subnetwork connection) is switched. User Network Interface. The interface between the user and a network node. Services transmitted through an ordinary way, once a failure or interruption occurs, the data cannot be restored for lack of protection mechanism.
Unidirectional (protection) switching
UNI Unprotected
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-21
D Glossary
Unterminated Service
The service that is not terminated within the management domain of the network management system. Usage Parameter Control/Network Parameter Control. During the communication, the UPC is implemented to monitor the actual traffic on each virtual circuit that is input to the network. Once the specified parameter is exceeded, measures will be taken to control. NPC is similar to the UPC in function. The difference is that the incoming traffic monitoring function is divided into UPC and NPC according to their positions. The UPC locates at the user/ network interface, while the NPC at the network interface. To query all or some of the configuration data of the NE to the network management system and overwrite the configuration data saved at the NE layer of the network management system. The user of the network management system client or NE user. The user and password define the corresponding authority of operation and management. User set refers to the set of NMS users with the same management authorities. The default user group includes: system administrator, system maintainer, system operator and system supervisor. The attributes of user set include name and detailed description.
UPC/NPC
Upload
User
User group
V Virtual fiber The fiber that is created between different equipments. A virtual fiber is used to represent the optical path that bears SDH services in a WDM system. The channels (that is trail group) provided for trail-layer network nodes (such as a switch) in a path-layer network, and act as the basic unit of transport capacity of paths between trail-layer network nodes.
VC12,VC3 trail
D-22
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
VC4 server trail
The path rate of the VC4 server trail is 150.336 Mbit/s. The VC4 server trail provides transparent channels (that is, circuit group) for circuit-layer network nodes (for example, a switch) in a path-layer network, and acts as the basic unit of inter-office communication path. When the VC4 server trail is configured, only the higher order cross-connection of VC4 is generated in the intermediate NE, but no cross-connection is generated at the two ends, that is, no service is added/dropped. Therefore, the VC4 server trail is not a traditional service. It is only the basis for VC3 and VC12 trail creation. Virtual Channel Connection. The VC logical trail that carries data between two end points in an ATM network. Virtual Channel Identifier . The identifier in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which virtual channel the cell belongs. The field in the ATM (Asynchronous Transfer Mode) cell header that identifies to which VP (Virtual Path) the cell belongs. For SDH, the virtual containers (VC) to carry concatenated services are independent in terms of their location in the frame structures, so that they can be located flexibly. Like a normal NE, a virtual NE is also displayed with an icon on a window , but it is only an NE simulated according to the practical situation, which does not represents an actual NE. Therefore, the actual status of this NE cannot be queried and its alarm status cannot be displayed with colors. Usually, when the trail management function is used for the NEs or subnets the network management system cannot manage, or the equipment is interconnected to the equipment from other vendors for service configuration, the end-to-end service configuration method and the trail management capability are provided.
VCC
VCI
VPI
Virtual concatenation
Virtual NE
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-23
D Glossary
Wave band
A board like the MB2 divides the wavelength resources into such fixed wavelength groups as 1 - 4, 5 - 8 and 9 - 12, and so on. A wavelength group is called a wave band, and a wave band carrying services to be added or dropped is called add/drop wave band. Wait to Restore. This command is issued when working channels meet the restore threshold after an SD or SF condition. It is used to maintain the state during the WTR period unless it is preempted by a higher priority bridge request. A period of time that must elapse before a trail/connection that is recovered from a fault can be used again to transport the normal traffic signal and/or to select the normal traffic signal. The wavelength path protection ring comprises the working ring and the protection ring. Service signals are transmitted in the two rings in opposite directions. In the wavelength path protection ring, service signals from one node (such as node A) to another node (such as node C) are transmitted via the working ring and the protection ring at one time. Node C receives the signals from the two rings at the same time and selects the signal with higher quality. The important data that is used to describe the wavelength protection structure. The wavelength path protection can only work with the correct configuration of the wavelength protection group. The ring-chain structure that is used to describe wavelength protection . The wavelength protection subnet is the basic network-level information and the basic network-level data oriented to user . The user can create or delete a protection subnet, set parameters for the protection subnet as required. In this way, the management at the network layer is realized. A specific path that is part of a protection group and is labeled working.
WTR
WTR time
Wavelength path protection ring
Wavelength protection group
Wavelength protection subnet
Working path
D-24
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D Glossary
WXCP service
Wavelength Cross-Connection Protection. The services that have path protection on a ring network. Services are dually fed and selectively received. The working service and the protection services are switched by using the cross-connection function.
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
D-25
E Acronyms and Abbreviations
E
A ACE AIS AMI APS ASON ASN.1 ATM B BIOS BML C CAR CC CDE CORBA COS CTP CPU D DCC
Acronyms and Abbreviations
Adaptive Communication Environment Alarm Indication Signal Alternate Mark Inversion code Automatic Protection Switching Automatically Switched Optical Network Abstract Syntax Notation One Asynchronous Transfer Mode
Basic Input/Output System Business Management Layer
Consent Access Rate Cross Connection Common Desktop Environment Common Object Request Broker Architecture Class Of Service Connection Termination Point Central Processing Unit
Data Communication Channels
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
E-1
DCN DNI DPC DWDM E ECC ELL EML EMS EPG EPL EPLn EVPL EVPLn F FD FDFr FEC FIFO FTP G GCT GE GNE GUI GCM H HA I ID IDL
Data Communication Network Dual Node Interconnection Destination (signalling) Point Code Dense Wavelength Division Multiplexing
Embedded Control Channel Encapsulation Layer Link Element Management Level Element Management System Equipment Protection Group Ethernet Private Line Ethernet Private LAN Ethernet Virtual Private Line Ethernet Virtual Private LAN
Flow Domain Flow Domain Fragment Forward Error Correction First In First Out File Transfer Protocol
GUI Cut-Through Gigabit Ethernet Gate Network Element Graphic User Interface Global Cluster Manager
High-Availability
Identity Interface Definition Language
E-2
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
IGMP IIOP ION IMAP ITU-T IP L LAN LAG LCAS LCT M MAC MDP ME MO MODEM MPLS MS MSP MSTP MIB MIT MTNM NE NEL NML NMS O OADM
Internet Group Management Protocol Internet Inter-ORB Protocol Intelligent Optical Network Integrated Management Application Platform International Telecommunication UnionTelecommunication Standardization Sector Internet Protocol
Local Area Network Link Aggregation Group Link Capacity Adjustment Scheme Local Craft Terminal
Media Access Control Message Dispatch Process Managed Element Managed Object Modulator-Demodulator Multi-Protocol Label Switching Multiplex Section Multiplex Section Protection Multi-Service Transmission Platform Management Information Base Managed Object Instance Tree Multi-Technology Network Management Network Element Network Element Level Network Management Level Network Management System
Optical Add/Drop Multiplexer
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
E-3
OAM OCH OMG ORB OSF OSS OSN OSI OTS OTM OTU P PC PDH PE PG PM PP PRBS PSTN PTP PVP Q QoS R RAS RDI RMON RPR S SCSI
Operation Administration Maintenance Optical Channel Object Management Group Object Request Broker Operation System Function Operation Support System Optical Switch Net Open Systems Interconnection Optical Transmission Section Optical Terminal Multiplexer Optical Transponder Unit
Personal Computer Plesiochronous Digital Hierarchy Provider Edge Protection Group Performance Monitor Path Protection Pseudo Random Binary Sequence Public Switched Telephone Network Physical Termination Point Permanent Virtual Path
Quality of Service
Remote Access Server Remote Defect Indication Remote Monitoring Resilient Packet Ring
Small Computer Systems Interface
E-4
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
SD SDH SML SMS SNML SNMS SMTP SNC SNCP SNPP SONET SSL SSM T TAO TCA TCM TCP TD TMF TMN TP U UPC UPS UTC V VB VC VC VC
Signal Degradation Synchronous Digital Hierarchy Service Management Layer Service Management System Sub-Network Management Layer Subnetwork Management System Simple Mail Transfer Protocol Subnetwork Connection Sub-Network Connection Protection Sub-Network Point Pool Synchronous Optical Network Security Socket Layer Synchronization Status Message
The ACE ORB Threshold Crossing Alarm Tandem Connection Monitoring Transport Control Protocol Traffic Descriptor Telecommunication Management Forum Telecommunication Management Network Termination Point
Usage Parameter Control Uninterrupted Power Supply Coordinated Universal Time
Virtual Bridge Virtual Connection Virtual Circuit Virtual Container
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)
E-5
VC VCI VCS VVR VxVM VLAN VPI W WAN WDM WTR
Virtual Channel Virtual Channel Identifier Veritas Cluster Server Veritas Volume Replicator Veritas Volume Manager Virtual LAN Virtual Path Identifier
Wide Area Network Wavelength Division Multiplexing Wait-to-Restore
E-6
Issue 03 (2010-08-16)

Huawei Imanager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Enviado por

Dados do documento

Título original

Direitos autorais

Formatos disponíveis

Compartilhar este documento

Compartilhar ou incorporar documento

Opções de compartilhamento

Você considera este documento útil?

Este conteúdo é inapropriado?

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

Huawei Imanager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Enviado por

Direitos autorais:

Formatos disponíveis

iManager U2000 Unified Network Management System V100R002C01

Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

HUAWEI TECHNOLOGIES CO., LTD.

Trademarks and Permissions

Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

About This Document

About This Document

Application Developer Data Configuration Engineer

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

About This Document

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

About This Document

Changes in Issue 03 (2010-08-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Changes in Issue 02 (2010-07-16) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Changes in Issue 01 (2010-05-18) Based on Product Version V100R002C01

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

2 Format of Notification Events..................................................................................................2-1

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

A Object Naming Rules..............................................................................................................A-1

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

D Glossary.....................................................................................................................................D-1 E Acronyms and Abbreviations.................................................................................................E-1

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

1.2 Configuration Management

Test and diagnosis

Equipment configuration Port configuration

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Description SDH: synchronous digital hierarchy

Delivery of end-to-end WDM services

Delivery of end-to-end SDH ASON services

ASON: automatically switched optical network

Delivery of end-to-end Ethernet services

The user can perform the following operations:

FDFr: flow domain fragment ELL: encapsulation layer link

Delivery of end-to-end RTN services Delivery of SDH services of individual NEs

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

MSTP: multi-service transmission platform ATM: asynchronous transfer mode

Delivery of PTN services of individual NEs

The user can perform the following operations:

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)

2 Format of Notification Events

Format of Notification Events

Huawei Proprietary and Confidential Copyright Huawei Technologies Co., Ltd.

2 Format of Notification Events

iManager U2000 Northbound CORBA Interface Developer Guide (Configuration)